JP2020049388A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of easily recognizing a variation state of a pattern by a tentative stop display mode.SOLUTION: A pattern 1335 shown in (1) and a pattern 1336 shown in (2) are display modes of patterns (larger patterns) included in a large pattern group each. The pattern 1335 shows a state in which a display mode of an auxiliary element 1333 is not expressed clearly, and the display mode is the one from a variation start to a pattern stop (tentative stop). The pattern 1336 indicates a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is clearly expressed by a first color (for example, a silver color). The display mode (specification) of the auxiliary element 1333 shows a state during a pattern stop (tentative stop).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 173

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Since the symbols are hit in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the effective line, and the symbols in the variable display are temporarily stopped, the fluctuation display is continued from the temporary stop state to just before the end of the fluctuation due to the fluctuation. There is a gaming machine capable of maintaining a player's expectation for a game by strongly giving the player a sense of expectation.

JP 2002-153640 A

However, the state of symbol fluctuation could not be easily recognized by the temporary stop display mode.
In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily recognizing a symbol change state by a temporary stop display mode.

  In order to achieve the above object, the following gaming machines are provided. The gaming machine includes a display unit that can display a variable display game that displays symbols in a variable manner, and a control unit that causes the display unit to display the variable display game. The control means enables the display means to display a first temporary stop display mode and a second temporary stop display mode different from the first temporary stop display mode as a temporary stop display of the symbol, and displays the symbol during the variable display. The mode and the display mode of the symbol during the temporary stop display in the second temporary stop display mode are made different.

  According to the first aspect, in the gaming machine, it is possible to easily recognize the fluctuation state of the symbol by the temporary stop display mode.

It is a perspective view showing an example of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of the composition of the production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a collective display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of a main process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a main process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an initial value random number update process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an input process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a switch reading process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of an output process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a random number update process 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the fraud & winning monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of winning number counter updating processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the game machine state check processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the payment busy signal check processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure game processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the starting opening switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a hard random number acquisition process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure starting port switch common processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure reservation information judging processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special winning opening switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 1 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure 2 change start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit flag 1 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit flag 2 setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a big hit determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit determination processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a variation pattern setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the change start information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) of the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure change processing transition setting process (special figure 2) of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during special figure change of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a special figure display process transition setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during special figure display of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of a special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a high probability change frequency update process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the production mode information check processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a fanfare / interval processing transition setting process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing 1 during small hit fanfare of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of processing during a fanfare / interval according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing during opening of a special winning a prize mouth of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of processing during opening of a special winning opening of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the big hit end processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end setting processing 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of big hit end setting processing 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during a small hit fanfare of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of processing change setting processing during small hits of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing during small hits of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit operation change setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a timing chart of a small hit operation of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the small hit remaining sphere process shift setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of small hit residual ball processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit end processing shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of small hit end processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the special figure usual processing shift setting processing 3 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the production command setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the symbol variation control processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a blink control timer initial value table of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the distribution processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a 2-byte distribution process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flowchart of the general-purpose game process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the regular electricity winning switch monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the usual figure usual processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a general-purpose everyday process shift setting process 1 according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing change setting processing during normal figure change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the processing during normal figure change of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of processing shift setting processing during normal display in the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a process during normal-drawing display according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the process change setting processing during normal time per figure of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process during a regular drawing hit of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the electric power operation shift setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a general electricity operation timing chart of a normal fluctuation winning device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the electric power remaining sphere processing of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a per-figure end processing transition setting process of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of end processing per day figure of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the usual figure shift processing setting processing 2 of the 1st embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a segment LED editing process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the magnet fraud monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of an external information editing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the main prize ball signal editing processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a transmission timing chart of a main prize ball signal of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a start-up port signal editing process according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the main processing in the production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of the reception command analysis processing in the production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration control processing in the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control device of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of a 2nd embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special fluctuation winning device of the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a production flow of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a production flow of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 5) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 6) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing the correspondence of a unit of accumulation display and a round of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the timing chart which shows the execution timing of the special round progress production of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart of the clearing process of the cumulative round counter of the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a production flow of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 7) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 8) of a screen which a display of a 2nd embodiment displays. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to a first modification of the second embodiment. It is a figure showing the correspondence of a character and production of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a timing chart which shows the timing which can accept selection of a character of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a screen which a display of a 3rd embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of a timing chart which shows the timing which can accept selection of the character of modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the flow chart of the departure effect setting processing of the modification 2 of the 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the flow chart of the departure effect setting processing of the modification 3 of the 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the flow chart of the character selection effect setting processing of modification 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by a display device according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the flow chart of the character selection effect setting processing of modification 5 of the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the flow chart of the character selection effect setting processing of modification 6 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the flow chart of the character selection effect setting processing of modification 7 of the third embodiment. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of options according to a selected character according to Modification 7 of the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of per-hit performance of a 4th embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of a game progress of winning A of a 4th embodiment. It is a timing table which shows an example of the game progress of winning B of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a big hit system command list of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart showing the big winning opening opening mode in 1R and 2R of winning A and the big winning opening opening mode in 1R of winning B of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a timing chart showing the reception timing of the big winning a prize opening nth command of the fourth embodiment, and the display timing of the display corresponding to the round. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of correspondence of a round correspondence display and a round of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of correspondence of the number of rounds of a 4th embodiment, and the number of unit conversion rounds. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a screen which a display of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 5) of a screen which a display of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of a model specification type command list of modification 1 of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence of the award ball number of the modification 1 of 4th Embodiment, and a unit conversion award ball number. It is a figure showing an example of a screen which a display of modification 1 of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of correspondence of the number of prize balls of the modification 1 of a 4th embodiment, and the number of accumulation points. It is a figure showing an example of a per-hit performance table including the presence or absence of the V notification game of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the game flow of probability variation notification for every hit of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the game flow of the V information game of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of progress of a V information game in winning B of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 6) of a screen which a display of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing the example (the 7) of the screen which the display of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 8) of a screen which a display of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of progress of the V information game in hit X of the modification 2 of the 4th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a modification 2 of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a modification 2 of a 4th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of a decoration pattern of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode during a change in decoration symbol A of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing the example of the display screen in the display of a 5th embodiment (the 2). It is a figure showing the example of the display screen in the display of a 5th embodiment (the 3). It is a figure (the 4) showing an example of the display screen in the display of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which shows the switching timing of the decoration symbol display mode in the special figure game change of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the decoration pattern of modification 1 of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display screen in the display of the modification 2 of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the large design in the display of modification 2 of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the temporary stop display mode list according to the state of the large symbol in the display device of the modification 2 of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (the 1) of a screen which a display of a modification 2 of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 2) of a screen which a display of a modification 2 of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 3) of a screen which a display of a modification 2 of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example (the 4) of a screen which a display of a modification 2 of a 5th embodiment displays. It is a figure showing an example of temporary stop display mode of a large design in a display of modification 3 of a 5th embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating an example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

  The gaming machine (pachinko machine) 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate (transparent member) holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12.

  On the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, and the like are built in, decoration and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, and the like are notified of abnormal colors (for example, A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing) in red) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12. In addition, when an abnormality occurs, the details of the abnormality are notified by output sounds (voices) from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for payment abnormality notification in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

  Also, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (reservoir plate) 21 for supplying game balls to a hit ball launching device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An outlet 22 for the upper plate ball flowing out, a lower plate (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball firing device, and the like are provided. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided an option setting section 25 for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25a are provided around the upper surface of the option setting unit 25, and a decision button switch 25b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting unit 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit in which the player sets the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting an effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining an effect mode. Further, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

  When the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the gaming machine 10 causes the player's operation to intervene based on the player's operation received from the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b. Can be performed. For example, an effect in which a player's operation is intervened includes an effect in a fluctuating display game (decorative special figure fluctuating display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character displayed on the display 41 can be operated, or the identification information in the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

  On the right side of the option setting unit 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an operation is performed to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device causes the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to play a game ball 32 on the front of the game board 30. (See FIG. 2). Further, by operating the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume radiated from the speakers 19a and 19b and set the brightness of the game board 30. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30 respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is mounted in a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. In other words, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, protrude forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent game balls from jumping from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube: cathode ray tube). In a region (display region) where an image on the display screen can be displayed, a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to a game such as a character that produces a special figure variable display game and a background image that enhances the rendering effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are displayed in a variable manner (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for an effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, a board effect device 44 that performs a game effect by operating is provided on the left and right portions of the center case 40. The board presentation device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol start gate (general symbol start gate) 34 for giving a start condition of the general symbol change display game. The game ball that has won the general-purpose starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three general prize holes 35 are arranged. On the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the general-purpose starting gate 34, one general prize hole 35 is provided. The mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by a winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Immediately below the start winning opening 36, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition of the special figure variable display game.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot flow in is maintained. Then, when the result of the normal-floating fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device is used to open the normal fluctuation prize device 37 easily. The state can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like.
Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and to the right of the starting winning opening 36, special fluctuations that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. A winning device (large winning port) 38 is provided.

  The special fluctuation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end side is tilted forward, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game. The large winning opening is converted from a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous for the player). That is, the special variable prize winning device 38 includes, for example, a large prize winning opening which is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large prize winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. During the state, the large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Has become. The game balls that have won the special variable winning device 38 are detected by the special winning opening switch 38a (see FIG. 3).

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, of the gaming area 32 in which the game balls flow, the left area of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. It has been. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left game area (so-called left hit), thereby aiming at winning in the starting winning opening 36, and firing a game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim for a prize to the ordinary figure starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation prize device 37 and the special fluctuation prize device 38.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, at a position corresponding to the right game area, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end of the center case 40 is disposed, and the flow is shifted to the right game area. Is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  Further, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game, which are the special figure change display game, and the general figure start gate 34 are provided. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game triggered by winning, and displaying various information.

  The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 hold display unit 52, a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a general symbol display unit. 55, a general-purpose hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an example of the control system of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in a comprehensive manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. It comprises a data bus 140 and the like.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. The operation clock and timer interrupt of the game microcomputer 111 and a reference of a random number generation circuit are provided. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generating a clock signal is provided. A predetermined level DC voltage such as DC (Direct Current) 32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100. It is made operational.

  The power supply device 400 includes an AC (Alternating Current) -DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V DC from a 24 V AC power supply, and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower-level DC voltage such as 12 V DC or 5 V DC from the 32 V DC voltage. A power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the game microcomputer 111 when a power failure occurs, and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for notifying the occurrence or recovery of the power failure.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, May be provided on the main substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, as in the first embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal By providing the generation unit 430, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the exchange target.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be constituted by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, a built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, so that the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the 32 V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410 and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, at the time of turning on the power or recovering from the power failure, the reset signal is output after a lapse of a predetermined time from that point.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated. Based on the signal, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 are forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of a forced interrupt signal, and resets the entire control system.

  The game microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B, and a RAM 111C that can be read and written at any time.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable) may be used.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a fluctuation pattern table for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the effect contents, the presence / absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory. In addition, the variation pattern table includes a variation variation pattern table selected when the result is incorrect, a large variation pattern table selected when the result is a large hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern that is a pattern (a first-half variation group table, a first-half variation pattern selection table, and the like) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached, when a part of the plurality of display results has not yet been derived and displayed, This refers to a display state in which the derived display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state deviates from the display condition of the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed. No display mode. Then, for example, a state in which a variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfy a condition for a special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure change display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure change display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information in each of the left, middle, and right change display areas on the display device for a predetermined time. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas satisfy the condition of the special result mode (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any one of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode (for example, the same state). The state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be a reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the reach effects having different possibilities (different expected values) of deriving the special result mode include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach are set. Note that the expected value increases in the order of “no reach” <“normal reach” <“special 1 reach” <“special 2 reach” <“special 3 reach” <“premier reach”. The reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived (a big hit) in the special figure variable display game. In other words, the special display mode may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (in the case of a loss). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for solenoids and display devices to output the game machine 10 Performs overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure change display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a change pattern (various types) in the special figure change display game. A random number generating circuit for generating a random number of a fluctuation pattern for determining a reach or a variable display without a reach (including an execution time of a variable display game), a hit random number for determining a hit of a universal map variable display game, and the like. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms (ms)) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit. Have.

  Further, the CPU 111A obtains any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111 </ b> A determines the game result (win (big hit or small hit) or miss) of the special figure change display game, the probability state of the special figure change display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability). State), the operating state (time saving operation state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of stored memories, and the like, and selects one of the fluctuation pattern tables from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. To get. Here, when executing the special figure change display game, the CPU 111A forms a change distribution information obtaining unit that obtains one of the plurality of change pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out the. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball rental.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the starting winning port 36, and a starting port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variable winning device 37. The gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 in the normal figure starting gate 34 are connected to each other, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited incorrectly, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wire is cut off and floated. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, when the detection signal of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the winning port switch 38a, and the abnormality of the sensor and the switch are detected from the output of the proximity I / F 121. Is output to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a game sensor may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the second input port 123 and the gaming microcomputer 111.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of, for example, 5 V required for normal operation of the IC from the power supply device 400. Has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 asserts the enable signal CE (Chip Enable) 2 (changes to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding an address assigned to the second input port 123. By doing so, it can be read. The same applies to the third input port 124 and a first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). Signal indicating whether or not 200 is ready to accept a command), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating lack of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (fullness)), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for taking in a signal based on the input signal and supplying the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit on the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from outside.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, so that the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 to be output to the test test apparatus is turned off. It is configured to be. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the trial test apparatus via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that the one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special design information of the variable display game to the trial shooting test device of the accredited institution (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass production sale product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start-up switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, a detection signal which cannot be supplied to the test shooting test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the control cannot be performed is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selectively controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the trial test apparatus. I have.

  The output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and has a special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 and a universal electric solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37. A second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data is provided. The output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of a segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (a hall computer)) installed in a game arcade. Can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a firing permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b and the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal in response to a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , A second driver 138 b for outputting an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current for the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so as to drive a solenoid operated at 32V. In addition, 12 V DC is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  The dynamic driving method is achieved by applying a current to the anode terminal of the LED via a segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and extracting a current from the cathode terminal via a digit line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the sequentially selected LEDs to light them. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12V DC in order to give a level of 12V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided. Not provided.

Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of the effect control device according to the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC), like the game microcomputer 111, and a video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output for reproducing various melodies, sound effects, and the like from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a PROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs to be executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied in case of a power failure. A ferroelectric RAM (FeRAM) 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 serving as timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. Note that a RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the production, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, turns on the decorative lamp, And processing such as drive control of the solenoid and management of the production time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. The VDP 312 includes an image ROM 325 storing a character image and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (Video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, and a synchronizing signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM. Signal WAIT and the like are input as well.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 in the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) system. The video data, the horizontal synchronizing signal HSYNC, and the vertical synchronizing signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313. The video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address bus / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier or the like for driving an upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The output sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are converted into a production control command signal (production command). ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. I have.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having the provided LED (light emitting diode), a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable character or the like that enhances effect effects in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) is provided. These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address bus / data bus 340. It should be noted that a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15 and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. Good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and an enter button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and an effect character switch 47 for detecting an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44 and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 to detect the main control microcomputer A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor and a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and to electronic components controlled by the same. In addition to DC32V, a display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, a DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, a DC5V for a power supply voltage of a command I / F 331, and a DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. It is configured to be. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. In addition, it is supplied from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 and the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and to the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, and the like. And reset them. Further, a cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for judging the hit of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34, and reads the ROM 111B. Is compared with the judgment value stored in the game, and a process of judging a hit or miss of the ordinary figure change display game is performed. After the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the general symbol display unit 55 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a general symbol variance display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of the normal symbol change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first stop symbol to the third stop symbol is displayed on the general symbol display unit 55, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Is operated to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 forms a conversion control executing unit that performs conversion control of the conversion member (the movable member 37b). In the case where the result of the ordinary figure change display game is out of place, control is performed to display the outcoming result mode on the ordinary figure display section 55.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and based on the starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display game is executed. The random number value for the jackpot determination is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to perform a process of determining a hit or miss in the first special figure variation display game. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the big hit determination of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed based on the start memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit or miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the start winning region (start winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). .

  Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of setting an effect state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 forms an effect control unit that controls an effect relating to a game (such as a variable display game).

  When the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control apparatus 100 displays a special result mode or a small hit result mode on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. Is displayed, and a process of generating a special game state or a small hitting game state (ie, a process of executing a special game or a small hitting game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, and allows the game ball to flow into the large winning opening. Is performed. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after opening of the special winning opening, a special winning opening is achieved. Is defined as one round, and a control (cycle game) of repeating (repeating) the round a predetermined number of times is performed. That is, the game control device 100 forms a special winning opening opening / closing control unit that performs control to open and close the special winning opening when the stop result mode is the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result mode of the out of control on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54.

  Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high-probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special figure change display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of which of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game results in the high probability state, the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change game Both of the variable display games are in the high probability state.

  Further, based on the result of the special figure change display game, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (a specific game state, a normal figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state. In this time-saving state, the probability of being a winning result of the general-floor variation display game (general-figure probability) is set to a high probability (general-figure high-probability state) higher than 0 which is a normal probability (general-figure low-probability state). Is possible. Thereby, the opening time of the ordinary variable prize device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the ordinary variable prize device 37 is in the low probability state in the ordinary figure. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to “0” so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the general-figure variation display game (normal-figure variation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the general-figure stop time for displaying the result of the general-figure variation display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec × 1 time), The opening time of the second hit stop symbol (normal power opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the opening time of the third hit symbol (normal time of opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 3 times).

  It should be noted that the execution time of the general-float display game, the general-figure stop time, the number of times of the general-figure release, and the general-figure release time are set so that the general-figure fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 are controlled to reduce the working hours. For example, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-mentioned general-purpose variable display game (the general-purpose variable display time) to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time. (Eg, 10,000 ms equals 1000 ms). Further, in the time reduction state, it is possible to control the general stop time for displaying the result of the general change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds is set). 704 ms). Further, in the time-saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning game 37 is released as a result of the general fluctuation display game being hit, the release time (normal power release time) is changed to the second state in the normal state (low normal probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the ordinary power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) for one hit result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. The number of times (for example, four times) can be set to the second number of times of opening. Further, in the time reduction state, the probability of being a hit result of the general-figure change display game (general-figure probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal-figure low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. It is possible to set a probability (normal high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the time-saving state, the ordinary fluctuation winning device 37 is in the open state by changing one or more of the ordinary figure fluctuation time, the ordinary figure stop time, the number of ordinary electricity open times, the ordinary time open time, and the ordinary figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states different from each other. Further, when a hit occurs, one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

  Next, the configuration of the batch display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 32 LEDs from LED_00 to LED_31. The collective display device 50 performs various status displays according to the lighting modes of the LED_00 to the LED_31.

  The collective display device 50 sorts the various status display functions from LED_00 to LED_31, so that the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 hold display unit 52, the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 , A general symbol display unit 55, a general symbol hold display unit 56, and a status display unit 57. The round display section 51 displays the number of rounds in the special figure game by the lighting mode of four LEDs from LED_00 to LED_03. The special figure 1 hold display unit 52 displays the number of holds in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_04 and LED_05. The special figure 1 symbol display section 53 displays the symbols in the special figure 1 game by the lighting modes of the eight LEDs from LED_06 to LED_13. The special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of eight LEDs from LED_14 to LED_21. The general symbol display unit 55 displays a symbol in the general symbol game according to a lighting mode of four LEDs from LED_24 to LED_27. The general-purpose reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reservations in the general-purpose game by the lighting mode of the two LEDs, LED_28 and LED_29. The state display unit 57 displays the game state in the special figure game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_30 and LED_31. The special figure 2 reservation display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_22 and LED_23.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, first, a process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the value of a register or the like is saved at the start address of the region when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the high order. In step S4, 00h at the head of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

  Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a sub control unit (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with an instruction from the game control device 100 serving as a main control unit. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, and the like). It forms a waiting means for setting a waiting time.

  The timing of the power-on delay timer is performed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of data held in the RAM area. Thus, when calculating the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be controlled. It can be detected reliably. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the elapse of the standby time, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the elapse of the standby time, or the RAM initialization switch may be operated from power-on until the elapse of the standby time. It is necessary to keep operating 112. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be detected. Can be prevented.

  Next, after performing a process of setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7), measuring a standby time and monitoring occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12). Perform First, the number of times (for example, two times) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on is set. A determination is made (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal has not been continued for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is ON for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine 10 waits for the power to be shut off. . In this manner, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal has been continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and to appropriately cope with a failure at power-on. be able to.

  That is, the game control device 100 forms a power failure monitoring unit that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. Thus, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 serving as the main control unit is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the storage contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so that backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by “−1” (step S11), and the timer value becomes “0”. Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not expired, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). When the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access to a readable and writable RWM (Read Write Memory) such as the RAM 111C or EEPROM is permitted (step S12). S13), outputting off data to all output ports (setting to no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port mounted in the gaming microcomputer 111 in advance and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the first embodiment) is set (step S15). It is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 has been turned on based on the state of the first input port 122 previously read (step S16).

  If the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S16). If it is normal (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process of calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process shifts to step S21 (FIG. 7) to perform the process when the power is restored normally from the power failure.

  Further, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make means of conversion.

  In step S21 (FIG. 7), an initial value at the time of restoration from power failure is saved in an area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is capable of accepting the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. The state is undefined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is changed to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether the special figure is in the high probability state (the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state) (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. If the special map is in the high probability state (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23). For example, the high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50 is provided. Is turned on (lighting) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the later-described special figure game process is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S25), and step S31 is performed. Proceed to. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S25, at step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer wait demonstration screen command if a customer waits, Otherwise, a plurality of commands such as a command on the recovery screen) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to be permitted to access (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to zero (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, an initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in an area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demonstration area and an area related to setting of the effect mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined A plurality of commands such as a time (for example, 30 seconds) command for notifying the RAM initialization by light and sound are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, effect number information and high probability number information are transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of activating a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the game microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 by a frequency dividing circuit, and outputs a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 ms) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. A CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing the extracted random number as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). Is a pattern that determines By exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be allowed to set arbitrarily.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various initial value random numbers corresponding thereto (in the case of the first embodiment, a special symbol hit symbol is determined). RWM as the initial value (start value) of the random numbers (big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers), the random numbers that determine the hits in the ordinary figure (hit random numbers), and the random numbers that determine the hit symbols in the ordinary figure (hit symbol random numbers) After saving in a predetermined area (step S33), an interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on. ), The regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (Step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. It is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit random number, the small hit random number, the hit random number, and the hit random number are This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a processing unit. Also, in the case of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is used in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes round. "Has been adopted. Each of the above random numbers may be a counter-type update by “+1” or “−1”, or may be a random-type update in which all values in the range appear randomly without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times (for example, two times) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure monitoring is performed. It is determined whether the signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the check of the power failure monitoring signal (loop process) are repeatedly performed. By permitting an interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt is executed. Is kept waiting by the initial value random number update process, thereby avoiding pressure on the interrupt process.

  Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both methods are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the initial value random number updating process, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. In the case where the initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing is not performed as in the embodiment and is performed only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update processing, This has the advantage that the main processing is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal is not continued for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is ON (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily inhibiting interruption (step S39) is performed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off (step S43) and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44), access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the processing (step S45), the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general and the slave control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300) for performing various controls in accordance with the instructions from the main control means Etc.), when the power is turned on, the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device. Device 100) and power outage monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) If the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) has a RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an operation of the initialization operation unit. And an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the information stored in the RAM 111C, so that the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits the access to the RAM 111C after the elapse of the standby time.
[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the checksum calculation process according to the first embodiment. This checksum calculation process is the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RAM is set as the start value of the calculation address (step S101), and the number of repetitions is set (step S102). Here, the number of repetitions is the number of bytes of the RAM used. Next, “0” is set as the calculated value (step S103).

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S104), the calculated address is updated by "+1" (step S105), and the number of repetitions is updated by "-1" (step S106). ), It is determined whether the calculation of the checksum has been completed (step S107). If the calculation is not completed (step S107; N), the process returns to step S104 and repeats the above processing. If the calculation has been completed (step S107; Y), the checksum calculation process ends.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the initial value random number update processing according to the first embodiment. This initial value random number updating process is the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the above-described main process. In the initial value random number updating process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S111), the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by “+1” (step S112), and the hit initial value random number is updated by “+1”. Is updated (step S113), and the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by "+1" (step S114), and the initial value random number updating process ends. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which is an initial value of a random number which determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number which determines the small hit stop symbol of the special figure. Is a random number that is the initial value of. In addition, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number that determines a hit in the ordinary figure changing game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is an initial value of a random number that determines a winning symbol in the ordinary figure changing game. It is a random number that becomes It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not exist in a model having no small hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, a timer interrupt process in the above-described main process will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the timer interrupt process according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs in the above-described main process from when an interrupt is issued to when the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

  The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

  When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S121). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing for transferring a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main processing) to the RWM. Next, an upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, a D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and fetching of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S123) are performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S124) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. When a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the firing permitting signal is set to a state where it can be set to a permitted state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the payout control device. At this time, no signal processing or the like is performed. The firing permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the game control device 100, and is a second signal (a firing permission signal) indicating the state of the firing permission as viewed from the payout control device 200. Are also generated in the payout control device 200 and output to the firing control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both are permitted to fire, the game ball is configured to be ready to fire.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (Step S125) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (Step S126), and a random number update process 2 (Step S127) are performed. Thereafter, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the winning port switch 38a shown in FIG. A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) for performing whether the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is open or the like is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S129) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S130) for performing a process related to the general figure variation display game are performed.

  Next, a segment LED editing process (step S131) for driving a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 to display a special figure change display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, and the magnetic sensor 61 Inspection of magnet fraud (step S132), which performs a process of checking a detection signal from the system to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a process of checking a detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. A monitoring process (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S134) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt. This is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of the timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S123) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the input processing according to the first embodiment.

  In this input processing, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S141). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S142), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S142). S143). Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the address of the second input port 123 is prepared (step S144), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S145), and unused bit data is prepared (step S145). S146). Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port. Next, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S147), and a switch reading process (step S148) is performed. Here, in the first embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value to a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set to an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the address of the third input port 124 is prepared (step S149), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S150), and unused bit data is prepared (step S150). In step S151, bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S152). Then, a switch reading process (step S153) is performed, and the input process ends.

  As the switches monitored by the first input port 122, as shown in FIG. 3, the glass frame open detection switch 63, the body frame open detection switch 64, the RAM initialization switch 112 (unused in this processing), There are a power failure monitoring signal (unused in this process) generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400, a dispensing abnormality status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, an overflow switch signal, and a touch switch. The switches to be monitored at the second input port 123 include a start-up opening 1 switch 36a (“start-up opening 1 winning signal”) and a start-up opening 2 switch 37a (“start-up opening 2 winning signal”, “normal electric accessory 1” Winning signal 1 is also output), winning opening switch 35a ("normal winning opening winning signal"), large winning opening switch 38a ("special electric accessory 1 winning signal"), and gate switch 34a ("normal pattern 1 related to" Gate passing signal 1 "). The switches monitored by the third input port 124 include a panel radio wave sensor 62, a switch abnormality detection signal, a magnetic sensor 61, a frame radio wave illegal signal, and a payout busy signal.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S148 and S153) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the switch reading process according to the first embodiment. In this switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S161). If there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S162), and the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S163), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is set. Is saved (step S164). After that, it waits for a delay time (about 100 μs) to elapse before the second reading (step S165).

  After the elapse of the delay time (about 100 μs), the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read for the second time (step S166). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of the unused bit is cleared (step S167), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S168), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Is saved (step S169). Thereafter, in the first and second readings, a fixed bit pattern is created in which the bit having the same state is set to 1 and the different bit is set to 0 (step S170), and the logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is obtained. The determined bit is set (step S171).

  Next, in the first and second readings, an undefined bit pattern in which the same bit is set to 0 and a different bit is set to 1 is created (step S172), and the logic between the undefined bit pattern and the determined state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is taken and set as a previously held bit (step S173). This makes it possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to switch chattering or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined, saved as the currently determined state (step S174), the exclusive OR of the last time and the current determined state is calculated, and saved as the rising edge (step S175). The switch reading process ends.

  When a timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt processing, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been performed. However, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, a correct determination may not be performed. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem. Become.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S124) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the third output port 135 (see FIG. 3) for outputting segment data of the batch display device 50 (step S181). Next, the data output to the second output port 134 for outputting the data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S182).

  Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated by "+1" in the range of "0" to "3" (step S183), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated. The output data of the line is obtained (step S184). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting the LED_00 to the LED_31 of the collective display device 50, a round display, a special figure 1 hold display, a special figure 1 symbol display, a special figure 2 symbol display, an ordinary symbol display, an ordinary figure hold display, and There is a state display (game state display such as a time saving state or a high probability state).

  Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S185), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output and the fifth output port 137 for external information output (step S186). The external information synthesized in step S185 is “door / frame open” and “security signal”.

  Then, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S187), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for outputting the segment (step S188).

  Subsequently, various output data of the external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S189). The external information to be synthesized here is "big hit signal 1", "big hit signal 2", "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal 4", "symbol fixed number signal", "start opening signal", "main prize ball" Signal "and the like. Next, the combined data and the emission permission output data are combined (step S190), and the combined data is output to the fifth output port 137 for external information output and emission permission signal output (step S191).

  Next, data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S192). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S193).

  Next, data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S194). Further, data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S195). Then, data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S196), and the output processing ends.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout command transmission processing of the first embodiment. In this figure, the left column is a process of updating (increase) the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal, and the right column is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In the payout command transmission processing, first, out of a plurality of winning number counter areas provided according to the number of winning balls (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and fourteen winning balls), each of the plurality of winning number counter areas is checked. It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than “0” in the winning number counter area 2 that stores up to 255 winning (step S201). If there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and whether or not the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S203).

  When it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (updated by "-1") (step S204), and the winning number counter area 2 is deleted. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is obtained (step S205). Next, the value of the prize ball remaining area is added to the payout number (step S206), the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is “0” or more (step S209). If it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is equal to or more than "0" (step S209; Y), the main award ball signal output frequency is updated by "+1" (step S210), and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining award ball number area. (Step S211). Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), one pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) every 10 payout schedules, and 10 payouts from the payout substrate (payout control device 200). One pulse is output every time.

  Next, in the determination of step S203, it is determined that all checks have been completed (step S203; Y), or in the determination of step S209, it is determined that the subtraction result is not greater than or equal to "0" (step S209; N). In this case, if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the value of the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If the payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of the payout command transmission process is not set, and the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0”. , No subtraction is performed. As described above, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but is transmitted after a predetermined time has elapsed. The transmission of the payout command is also a condition that the payout control board side can pay out the prize ball.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213). If it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is “0” (step S213; Y), It is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined not by referring to the state of the port but by referring to the payout busy signal flag. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to be on (busy) include “during payout operation”, “ball lending operation”, “shot ball out error”, “overflow error”, “frame radio wave illegal occurrence "Medium", "Abnormality of paid-out ball detection switch (switch for monitoring the paid-out ball)", "Insufficient payout error", "During excessive payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls = the number of acquired game balls remaining) (when it is not 0) "and the like.

  Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215), and if there is no count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215). N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether the check of all areas is completed (step S217). If the checking of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

  In step S215, when there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S218), and the payout number corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is updated. The command is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S220). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

  When it is determined in step S213 that the value of the payout command transmission timer is not “0” (step S213; N), when it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y). If it is determined in step S217 that the check of all areas has been completed (step S217; Y), or if the processing of step S221 has been completed, the payout command transmission processing ends.

[Random number update processing 1]
Next, a random number update process 1 (step S126) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update process 1 according to the first embodiment. The random number updating process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are the targets of the initial value random number updating process.

  In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S231). If the big hit symbol random number in the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234). If the jackpot symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S231; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S232), and the next time of the loaded jackpot symbol random number of the ordinary figure is executed. Is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S233). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S234).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; N), it is determined whether the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S234; Y), the small hit symbol random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S235), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is loaded. Is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S236). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S237).

  If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; N), it is determined whether the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240). If the hit random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S237; Y), the hit initial random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S238), and the next initial value of the loaded hit random number is assigned to the corresponding random number counter (step S238). It is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number area (step S239). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S240).

  If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; N), the random number updating process 1 ends. If the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S240; Y), the winning symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S241), and the next initial value of the loaded winning symbol random number corresponds. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) is set in a register (start value setting register) (step S242), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update processing 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S127) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the random number update processing 2 of the first embodiment. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. Is set as an update target, and each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for the upper byte and the lower byte at different interrupts. In other words, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (the random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to:

  In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which random number of a plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is set to a value from “0” to “3”. The range is updated (step S251). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S252). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is obtained from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S253). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether the random number has completed one cycle.

  Subsequently, for example, a random number such as a counter (hereinafter, referred to as an M1 counter) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer 111 in the first embodiment. The value of the counter to which the appropriate value is set is loaded (step S254). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to random numbers. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S255). The mask value is different from the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 are updated. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. When updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although four bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is merely an example and is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the random number area to be updated (random number counter) is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; Y), the value of the M1 counter remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as an added value (hereinafter, this is referred to as a mask) The value is set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S257), and the process proceeds to step S259. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S256; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as an addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step S258). ), And proceed to step S259. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become “0”, and if “0” is added later, the value does not change from the value before the addition. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S259), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S259; Y), a value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set ( (Step S260), and the process proceeds to step S262. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S259; N), “0” is set as the upper one byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower one byte of the random number value Is set (Step S261), and the routine goes to Step S262.

  In step S262, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S257 or S258 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is greater than the upper limit determination value obtained in step S253. (Step S263). If the new random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; N), the new random number is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S265). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S263; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step S264), and this value is set to 1 byte. The random number or a 2-byte random number is saved in a lower random number area (step S265).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S266). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S266; N), the random number updating process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S266; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, its value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S267). Then, the random number update processing 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the startup winning opening 36 or the startup area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for the purpose.

[Winning port switch / status monitoring processing]
Next, the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table (for example, a port to which a detection signal from a count switch is input) corresponding to the winning opening switch 38a in the winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38). , And data indicating the bit position of the signal in the port, etc.) are prepared (step S271). Next, even if the special winning opening is not open, it monitors whether there is any fraud (illegal winning) winning in the special winning opening and executes a fraud & winning monitoring process for detecting a normal winning (step S272). .

  Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored for an illegal winning and a normal winning is performed. The detected fraud & winning monitoring process (step S274) is executed. Then, a winning port monitoring table of the winning port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the public telephone is prepared (step S275), and an unauthorized / winning monitoring process for monitoring for an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning (step S275). Step S276) is executed.

  Next, a winning port monitoring table for winning port switches (here, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the winning port switch 35a for the general winning port 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S277), and the winning number is updated. A number counter update process (step S278) is performed.

  Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which one of the plurality of switches and signals for monitoring the error state of the gaming machine 10 to be monitored this time is set to “0”. Is updated in the range from to (3) (step S279). After that, according to the value of the state scan counter, any one of a switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of a switch connector or the like, an out-of-shot shot error from the dispensing control device 200, an overflow error from the overflow switch, and an abnormal dispensing error. A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting an error monitoring based on a crab as a target is prepared (step S280). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S281) is performed.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting monitoring of an error based on any of the glass frame opening, the body frame opening, the frame radio irregularity, and the touch switch is prepared. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S283) is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284). If the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring is performed. The process ends. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the disconnection of the switch connector or the like according to the value of the state scan counter. A gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of the game machine as a target is prepared (step S285). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether or not an error has occurred (step S286) is performed, a payout busy signal check process (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process ends. Note that the payout busy signal check processing is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring is performed at a period of 16 ms.

[Illegal & winning surveillance processing]
Next, the fraudulent & winning monitoring process (steps S272, S274, S276) in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (see FIG. 17) will be described. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fraudulent and winning monitoring processing of the first embodiment. Each winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / error monitoring process includes “data for determining whether there is an input (monitoring switch bit)”, “lower address of fraud monitoring information”, “illegal winning”. "Lower address of number area", "illegal winning error notification command", "illegal winning number upper limit value (number of fraud occurrence determination)", "winning port switch table address", and "notification timer update information (permission / update)" It is assumed that information is defined.

  This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process performed on the large winning port switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38 and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. As for the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) and the ordinary electric power (normal fluctuation winning device 37), it is easy to forcibly open the opening / closing member, insert a game ball, and pay out a prize ball. In addition to monitoring for fraud.

  In this fraudulent & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is checked (step S291), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S292). The irregularity monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the large winning port switch 38a. When the winning opening switch to be monitored for the gaming machine state is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than a state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit of the ordinary drawing.

  If it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S292; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S293). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S293; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302). If there is an input at the target winning opening switch (step S293; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by "+1" (step S294), and the added illegal winning number after addition is the monitoring target fraud occurrence determination number (step S294). It is determined whether the number is equal to or more than (for example, 5) (step S295).

  The reason why the number of determinations is set to five is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball is in the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is passed after passing through or a noise is put on a signal from being immediately determined to be illegal. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is not necessarily illegal to easily determine that the information is illegal.

  If the number is not equal to or larger than the determined number (step S295; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300). If the number is equal to or greater than the determined number (step S295; Y), the number of unauthorized winnings is kept at the determined number of occurrences of fraud (step S296), and the initial value is saved in the target unauthorized winning notification timer area (step S297). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step S298), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S299), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S292; N), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S300), and a winning number counter updating process for setting a winning ball is performed (step S301). Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S302), and it is determined whether the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S303). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S303; N), the fraudulent and winning monitoring process ends. The information for which the update of the notification timer is not permitted includes the special winning opening switch 38a. This is because one large winning opening is monitored with two switches. When the timer is updated by monitoring both switches, the timer is updated at double speed, and as a result, the illegal timer times out in half the specified time. In order to avoid such a timer update, the update at the timing of the special winning opening switch which performs the monitoring process first is prohibited. When the update of the notification timer is permitted as in the case of the big winning port switch and the starting port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37 for which the monitoring process is performed later (step S303; Y), the target notification timer is “0”. If not, "-1" is updated (step S304). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to “0”.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is one of the large winning port switches 38a, and when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the other large winning port switch 38a. Is not allowed. This prevents the notification timer from being updated twice as frequently with respect to the fraudulent notification for the special variable prize device 38, thereby preventing the time-up from occurring in half the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). In addition, when the winning port switch of the gaming machine state monitoring target is the big winning port switch 38a or the starting port 2 switch 37a, the updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is "0" (step S305). If the value is not "0" (step S305; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud and winning monitoring is performed. The process ends. If the value is "0" (step S305; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target fraud release command is prepared (step S306), and the fraud prize release flag is set as a fraud flag. Is prepared (step S307). Then, the CPU 111A determines whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes “0” (step S308).

  When the value of the notification timer is “0” (step S308; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer is “0” in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the number of the target illegal winnings is Cleared (step S309), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310). When the value of the notification timer is not the moment when the value of the notification timer has become “0” (step S308; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer has become “0” in the previous fraud and winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag Is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S310; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S310; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S311), and effect command setting processing is performed (step S311). Step S312), and terminates the fraud & winning monitoring process. By the above processing, an injustice notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the occurrence of the injustice, and an infraction winning illegality release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the injustice release. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (steps S278 and S301) in the winning port switch / status monitoring process and the fraud & winning monitoring process will be described. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning number counter updating process of the first embodiment. The winning table of the winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / state monitoring process includes information on “number of repetitions” and “data for determining whether there is an input defined for each switch”. (Monitoring switch bit) "," lower address of winning number counter area 1 ", and" lower address of winning number counter area 2 ".

  In the winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S321), and whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (exactly, an input change). Is determined (step S322).

  If there is no input (step S322; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S331). If there is an input (step S322; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S323), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S324), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs. (Step S325). If no overflow has occurred (step S325; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S326). As a result, the winning counter for the prize ball (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size at this time is 2 bytes, and is updated in the range from “0” to “65535”. If an overflow has occurred (step S325; Y), the process of step S326 is bypassed.

  Next, the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S327), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step S328), and it is determined whether or not an overflow occurs (step S329). If no overflow has occurred (step S329; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S330). Thereby, the winning number counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size at this time is 1 byte, and is updated in a range from “0” to “255”. If an overflow has occurred (step S329; Y), the processing of step S330 is passed.

  When the table address is updated to the address of the next record in step S331, it is determined whether or not monitoring of all switches has been completed (step S332). If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step S332; N), the process returns to the process (step S322) of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S332; Y), the winning counter updating process is terminated. Through the above processing, a prize ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Game machine status check processing]
Next, the gaming machine state check processing (step S286) in the above described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the gaming machine state check processing of the first embodiment. Each gaming machine status monitoring table prepared in the winning opening switch / status monitoring process includes “lower address of the head address of the status monitoring region”, “port of the switch control region in which the target signal information is stored”. "Lower address of input state area", "Mask data for extracting only bits of target signal", "Signal on determination data", "State off command (in the case of error, meaning of error notification end command)", Information of a “state on command (meaning an error notification start command in the case of an error system)”, a “state off monitoring timer comparison value”, and a “state on monitoring timer comparison value” are defined.

  In this gaming machine state check processing, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S341), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is ON, that is, whether or not the signal indicates an error. A determination is made (step S342). Note that the case where the signal to be monitored is not ON means a normal state where there is no error for an error system, and a state where the touch switch is not touched. Also, the case where the signal to be monitored is ON means an error (abnormal or illegal) state for an error system, and a touch state for a touch switch.

  If the signal is not on in step S342 (step S342; N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step S343), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S344). Then, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S345), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  On the other hand, when the signal is ON (step S342; Y), a state ON flag is prepared as a state flag (step S346), and a target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S347). Then, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S348), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S349).

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step S349; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352). It is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step S349; N), that is, if the signal state has changed, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area. (Step S350). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S351), the target status monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S352), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value. (Step S353).

  If the value of the target status monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; N), this gaming machine status check processing ends. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S353; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by “−1” and kept at the value of “comparison value −1” (step S354). ), And compares the prepared status flag with the value of the target status flag area (step S355).

  Then, when the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step S355; Y), this gaming machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S355; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S356), and the prepared state flag is turned off. An effect command setting process of transmitting either the command or the status ON command is performed (step S357), and the gaming machine status check process ends.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
Next, the payout busy signal check process (step S287) in the winning port switch / state monitoring process will be described. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the payout busy signal check process according to the first embodiment.

  In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is on (step S361). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S361; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S361). Step S362), and sets the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (step S363). The OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value set here is set to, for example, 32 ms.

  If the payout busy signal is on in step S361 (step S361; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S364), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value is set (step S365). As the ON determination monitoring timer comparison value set here, for example, 32 ms is set.

  Next, the value of the busy signal state area is compared with the state of the current signal (step S366). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S366; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “+1” (step S369), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). When the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S366; N), that is, when the state of the signal changes, the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area ( Step S367). Then, the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to zero (step S368), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by "+1" (step S369), and it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370). ).

  When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer has not reached the timer comparison value (step S370; N), the payout busy signal check process ends. When the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (step S370; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by “−1” and kept at the value of “comparison value−1” (step S371). Then, the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S372), and the payout busy signal check processing ends.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S129) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special figure game process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the input of the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the setting of the special figure display is performed. In the special figure game process, first, a start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start-up 1 switch 36a and the start-up 2 switch 37a. In the start-up switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening 36 forming the first starting winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, extraction of various random numbers (big hit random number or the like) is performed. The game result preliminary determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance at the stage before the start of the special figure change display game based on the winning.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a (the special winning opening switch 1 and the special winning opening switch 2) provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is “0” (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number is obtained using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

  In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “0”, the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure fluctuation A special map ordinary process (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "1" in step A7, the special figure changing process is performed to set the stop display time of the special figure and to set information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit and the big winning port of each big hit A special figure display process (step A10) for setting a fanfare time according to the opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the process during the fanfare / interval, and the like is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is “3” in step A7, the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and information necessary for performing the special winning opening processing is set. Processing during the fanfare / interval (step A11) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "4", an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the last round, while an ending command is set if the big hit round is the last round, or a special winning opening remains A special winning opening processing (step A12) for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing is set, and if it is the final round, A special winning port remaining ball process (step A13) for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball in the special winning port and setting information necessary for performing the jackpot ending process is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hitting A small-hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is “8” in step A7, the small hit operation transition processing, the setting of the command for the small hit end screen, the setting of information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like are performed. The small hitting process (step A16) is performed.

If the special figure game processing number is "9" in step A7, a small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end processing is performed.
If the special figure game processing number is "10" in step A7, a small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure ordinary processing is performed.

  Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (step A19), a symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) related to the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A21), a symbol variation control process (step A22) related to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process is performed. To end. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not “0” (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do it.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure change display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and the special This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is activated). The condition device not operating means that the above-described flag is not set, for example, in a case where the small hit lottery is won. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag which is turned on / off by software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch which is turned on / off electrically. In addition, the "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to the present specification. It is used as a term having various meanings.

[Start port switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the start-up switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the start-up switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a starting port 1 (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to determine whether there is a winning in the starting port 1. It is determined whether or not it is (step A103).

If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting port 1 (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the starting opening 1 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special figure working hours (general power support) (step A104). . Note that the determination in step A104 is to determine whether or not the gaming state is under normal power support, and does not include the level of the probability state in the determination target.

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not working (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special figure is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, in the time saving state, a right-turn instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure change display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the winning opening 1 (start winning opening 36) does not win unless the player has left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless the player has right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than a left-handed game. However, when the starting port 1 receives a prize during the time-saving state (ie, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-turn instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and to cause the effect control device 300 to issue a notification (warning) for instructing right-hand operation.

  Next, after preparing a table for setting information of suspension by the starting port 1 (start winning port 36) (step A107), a common process for a special figure starting port switch (step A108) is performed.

  Next, a winning monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting port 2. (Step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the start-up opening 2 (step A111; N), the start-up switch monitoring process ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the starting opening 2 (step A111; Y), the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation prize device 37) is in operation, that is, the normal fluctuation prize. It is determined whether or not the device 37 is operated to be in an open state in which a game ball can be won (step A112). If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), step A114 is performed. The processing shifts to the processing of (1) and the subsequent processing is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal operation of the ordinary electric power is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not a fraudulent fraud has occurred, it is determined that a fraud has occurred if the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, a game ball cannot be won in a closed state, and a game ball can be won only in an open state. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal wins. If the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  In step A113, if it is determined that the unauthorized fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), a table for setting information of suspension by the starting port 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The start port switch common processing (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring processing is ended. If it is determined in step A113 that irregularities in the ordinary telephone are occurring (step A113; Y), the start-up switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start-up switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process according to the first embodiment.

  In the hard random number acquisition processing, first, non-winning information is set for the monitoring opening of the starting opening 1 (start winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A121). It is determined whether there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the mouth 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition processing ends. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step A123). A124).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted big hit random number is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125). Then, among the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) and the starting opening 2 (ordinary fluctuation winning device 37), the information on the winning opening of the monitoring opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process ends. .

[Tokuzu start switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure startup port switch common processing (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described startup port switch monitoring processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure starting port switch common processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.
In the special figure starting port switch common process, first, information on the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, is transmitted to a management device external to the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count, which is the output count, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135 by passing step A134. In the first embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output count area. When the loaded value is "255", when the value is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting storage) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored, among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, is less than the upper limit value ( Step A135). If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by “+1” ( (Step A136), and saves the starting port winning flag to be monitored (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A125). Step A139). Next, a jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the starting opening 1 (step A142; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the small hit symbol random number of the RWM is prepared. The data is saved in the storage area (step A144).

  Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.

  Next, a start command switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), and effect command setting processing (step A148) is performed to execute the special figure start port switch common processing. finish.

  Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and executes the special figure variable display game. And a starting winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory which is an execution right. The start winning storage means (RAM 111C) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting storage with a predetermined number as an upper limit, and starts. Various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 2 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special figure pending information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure suspension information determination process of the first embodiment.

  The special figure suspension information determination processing is a look-ahead processing for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  In the special figure reservation information determination processing, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A151).

When it is determined in step A151 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning opening 1 has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A152).

In step A152, when it is determined that the special figure is being shortened (step A152; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not being reduced (step A152; N), it is determined whether a large hit or a small hit is being performed (step A153).

If it is determined in step A153 that a big hit or a small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure suspension information determination processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that the big hit is not being performed or the small hit is not being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit based on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. Big hit determination processing (step A154) is performed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A155). If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164, where the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not a jackpot (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is to the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
When it is determined in step A158 that the winning opening 1 has not been won (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164. Is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the winning is to the starting opening 1 (step A158; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value to determine whether or not it is a small hit. Is performed (step A159).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A160). If the result of the determination is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information for the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164 to perform the subsequent processes.

  On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is set. After acquiring (step A162), the process proceeds to the process of step A164, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing (step A165) is performed. Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game (step A167). Perform

  Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the production command setting process (step A168) A169), and the special figure suspension information determination processing ends. Note that the special figure information setting processing in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting processing in step A167 are the same as the processing executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary processing.

  By the above processing, a look-ahead design command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. Then, it is transmitted to effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (pre-read result) of the result-related information (whether a big hit or a variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is rendered before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, to change the decoration special figure start storage display displayed on the display device 41, and to provide the player with the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure change display game. It becomes possible to inform.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Judgment) It forms a pre-judgment means. In addition, the timing at which the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the start winning game in which the start memory is generated, but also at any time before the fluctuation display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Grand Winner Switch Monitoring]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is being opened, that is, whether or not it is in a special game state (step A201). If the special winning opening is being processed (Y in step A201), the process proceeds to step A205, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A202).

  If the special winning port remaining ball is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the winning prize opening remaining ball is not being processed (step A202; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit is being processed (during the small hitting game state) (step A203).

  If the small hitting process is being performed (step A203; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If it is not during the small hit processing (step A203; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (step A204).

  If the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the small hit remaining sphere is being processed (Step A204; Y), the process proceeds to Step A205.

  Since the special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer becomes "0", the value of the special figure game processing number is checked to check the progress of the game. Can be checked. Therefore, to determine whether the special winning game is being opened, the special winning ball remaining ball is being processed, the small hit is being processed, or the small hit remaining ball is being processed, the value of the special figure game processing number is checked. Do it.

  Then, "0" is set to a winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the special winning opening added in the current special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A205), and is there an input to the special winning opening switch 1? Is determined (step A206).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A210, and the subsequent processes are performed. When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to " +1 "is updated (step A209).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210). If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), the process proceeds to step A214. The subsequent processing is performed. When there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), an effect command setting process (step A212) is performed, and the value of the winning counter is set to " +1 "is updated (step A213).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214). If the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. finish. When the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A215), and if the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed (step A215). In step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

  If the large winning prize remaining ball is not being processed (step A215; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A216). If the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A216; In Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends.

  If the small hit remaining ball is not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter ("1" or "2") is added to the big winning opening count (step A217), and the big winning opening count is reduced. It is determined whether or not it is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round (9)) (step A218).

  If the special winning opening count is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the special winning opening count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the information in the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero (step A220). ), It is determined whether or not the small hitting process is being performed (step A221).

  If the small hitting process is not being performed (step A221; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the small hitting process is being performed (step A221; Y), the value of the small hit opening operation end is saved in the special winning opening control pointer area (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

(Tokuzu usual processing)
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary processing (step A8) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 2 (the number of second start storages) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is “0” (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figure 1 is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311). (Step A311; N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), effect command setting processing (step A314) is performed, special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends. . On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311 (step A311; Y), special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0” in step A301 (step A301; N), special figure 2 change start processing (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is performed. The number-of-suspension command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, a special figure changing process transition setting processing (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  If the number of special figure 1 reservations is not “0” in step A306 (step A306; N), special figure 1 change start processing (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations is performed. The number-of-reservation command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, a special figure changing process transition setting processing (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure ordinary processing ends.

  As described above, the special figure 2 reservation number check is performed before the special figure 1 reservation number check, so that if the special figure 2 reservation number is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A302) Will be executed. That is, the second special figure change display game is executed prior to the first special figure change display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the game controller 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. The priority control means performs the priority control over the game.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A315) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1, first, "0", which is the processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing, is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A321). A322).

  Then, the information in the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. I do.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 change start processing (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 1 change start process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 1 change start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure change display game. In the special figure 1 change start process, first, a special figure 1 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the change symbol discrimination flag area (step A331), and the first special change A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the figure change display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting fluctuation start information of the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 change start process ends.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 change start processing (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure 2 change start process according to the first embodiment.

  The special figure 2 change start processing is processing performed at the start of the second special figure change display game. The same processing as the special figure 1 change start processing shown in FIG. It is done as.

  In the special figure 2 change start process, first, a special figure 2 change flag indicating the type of the special figure change display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the change symbol discrimination flag area (step A341), and the second special A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the figure change display game is a big hit is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which various kinds of information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (Step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting processing for setting fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (Step A347), and the special figure 2 change start process ends.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 1 setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) of the RWM and prepared (step A353), and information of the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is stored. "0" is cleared (step A354). The storage number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the first special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not there is (step SA356).

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A355) is a jackpot (step A356; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the missed information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value indicates whether or not the big hit is a small hit. Is determined (step A358), and it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step SA359).

  If the result of the small hit determination processing (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information was saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the small hit determination processing (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting processing is performed while the loss information is saved in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the first special figure change display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 change start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit flag 2 setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the RWM and prepared (step A372), and the information of the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is stored. "0" is cleared (step A373). Note that the reserved number 1 area is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure start storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the special figure 2 is the earliest). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is (step SA375).

  If the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the missed information was saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is not a jackpot (step A375; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends while saving the deviation information to the jackpot flag 2. As described above, in the first embodiment, the result of the second special figure change display game is one of “big hit” and “missing”.

[Big hit determination process]
Next, details of the above-described special figure suspension information determination processing, the big hit flag 1 setting processing, and the big hit determination processing (steps A154, A355, A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the big hit determination process according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or greater than a lower limit determination value that is a lower limit value of the jackpot determination value and is equal to or less than an upper limit determination value that is an upper limit value of the jackpot determination value. Is determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), it is out of place. Therefore, "other than a big hit (outlier)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the game is in a high probability state (the probability state of the special figure change display game is a high probability state) (step A383). .

  If the high probability is high (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value during the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A384). Step A386). If the state is not the high-probability state (step A383; N), an upper-limit determination value during low-probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big-hit random number is larger than the upper-limit determination value (step A385). A386).

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing ends. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or a miss, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), it is out of order. Then, "other than the big hit (outlier)" is set as the determination result (step A387).

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the big hit judgment processing ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the above described special figure suspension information determination processing and the small hit determination processing (steps A159 and A358) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hit determination process according to the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the small hit determination processing, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). In addition, the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or larger than the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is equal to or smaller than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit has occurred. Of course, the range of the big hit determination value and the range of the small hit determination value are set so as not to be covered.

  If the value of the big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (Step A391; Y), that is, if the big hit is a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (Step A393), and the small hit judgment processing ends.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), a small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and it is determined whether or not the target big hit random number value is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. A determination is made (step A392).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392; Y), that is, when the big hit is judged to be a miss, a miss is set as the judgment result (Step A393), and the small hit judgment processing ends.

  If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if the big hit is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394), and the small hit judgment processing ends. I do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step A333) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of reservations) First, the big random number of the big hit symbol is loaded (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 and a stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction determination is performed. It is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the first embodiment, the effect mode shifts at the timing of the hit, and the shift destination of the effect mode to shift to after the end of the hit changes according to the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit). In addition, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, a 4R surely changing design) among the big hits in the special map 1 is used, the production mode of the transition destination is determined to be a certain change depending on whether or not the game state is being changed. It is determined whether or not to enter the production mode, or to transition to the production mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether or not it is a positive change. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A411). Next, a special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stopped symbol number area (step A413).

  Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of a loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area. Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the information of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) is cleared to "0" (step A422). Then, the information of the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 reserved number) is cleared to "0" (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing (step A343) in the above-described special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area ( The jackpot symbol random numbers are loaded from (for the number of holds 1) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stopped symbol number area (step A434). By this processing, the type of the special result is selected.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 and a stop symbol in the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction determination is performed. It is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, the effect mode of the transition destination is a special effect mode in which the change in the certainty is determined regardless of the big hit symbol. Then, an ornament special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure change display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A443), and effect command setting processing (step A444) is performed. The decoration special figure command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the information in the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to "0" (step A446). ), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.

  That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the start port 1 (start winning port 36), and executes the first variable display game at the start port 2 (normal variable winning device 37). A variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. In addition, the game control device 100 forms a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting processing]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A166, A334, and A344) in the special figure suspension information determination processing, the special figure 1 change start processing, and the special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure information setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the case of the first embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the fluctuation, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of the fluctuation. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress of the special figure change display game, and the like.

  In the special figure information setting process, first, a first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and a first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).

  Next, the first-half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).

  Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the fluctuation distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stopped symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only when it is out of range when the number of reservations is large, so in other cases, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. Note that a fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining a fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

  Next, a second half variable group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and a second half variable group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).

  Next, a second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special figures and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).

  Next, the second-half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process ends. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area, the fluctuation distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stopped symbol, the number of suspensions, and the effect mode is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, only in the case of a miss, the occurrence rate of reach changes according to the number of holdings (the occurrence rate of reach decreases when the number of holdings is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, details of the above-described special figure suspension information determination processing, special figure 1 change start processing, and change pattern setting processing (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 change start will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the variation pattern setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  The change pattern is a first half change pattern that is a change mode from the start of the special figure change display game to the reach state, and a second half change pattern that is a change mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure change display game. The first half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, a fluctuation group address table is set (step A471), an address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is obtained and prepared (step A472), and the target fluctuation pattern is set. The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A473). In the first embodiment, the structure of the second-half change group table is different between a hit and a non-hit. Specifically, the size for hitting is 1 byte size, and the size for hitting is 2 byte size. The rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of losing, and even one byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the size of the hit is one byte. Therefore, at the time of hit, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used. In addition, the occurrence rate of outliers is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size of outliers is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure change display game is a miss (step A474). If the result is a miss (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed. The process shifts to A477 and performs the subsequent processes. If it is not a loss (step A474; N), a distribution process (step A476) is performed, the process proceeds to step A477, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  Then, an address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is obtained and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, a distribution process (step A479) is performed, the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and saved in the second half variation number area (step A480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first-half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared. (Step A484). After that, a distribution process (step A485) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, saved in the first variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from a plurality of variations.

[Change start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting processing (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 change start processing and special figure 2 change start processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start information setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the change start information setting process, first, information on the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, a first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and a first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, a second half variation time value table is set (step A494), and a second half variation time value corresponding to the second half variation number is obtained (step A495).

  Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), and a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by “−1” (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the information on the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the change start information setting processing ends.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure change display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 forms a determination unit that determines various random numbers stored in the start storage unit (RAM 111C). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special figure change display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined change pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure change display game. Set the details of the effect in the decoration special figure change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure change display game includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information regarding the number of storages to be started (the number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information regarding a stop symbol, and a change in the special figure change display game. A fluctuation command including information on the pattern and a stop information command including information on extension of the stop time are given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the change command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Transition setting during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 1)]
Next, details of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process shift setting processing (special figure 1) of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 1), first, the processing number relating to the special figure change processing is set to “1” as the processing number (step A511), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. The number is saved (step A512).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). The signal related to the start of the change of the special figure 1 is a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 changing signal. Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A515), and the initial value of the flash control timer (the timer of the flash cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) is stored in the special figure 1 flash control timer area. (For example, 100 ms) is saved (set) (step A516), and the transition setting processing during special figure change (special figure 1) ends.

[Transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 2) (step A305) in the above-described special figure ordinary processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process transition setting processing (special figure 2) of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure change processing transition setting processing (special figure 2), first, the processing number “1” relating to the special figure change processing is set as the processing number (step A521), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. The number is saved (step A522).

  Then, the information in the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal relating to the start of change of the special figure 2 (the special symbol 2 changing signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). Thereafter, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), and the initial value of the flashing control timer (the timer of the flash cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) is stored in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area. Is saved (set) (step A526), and the special figure changing process transition setting processing (special figure 2) ends.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure changing process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure changing process, first, a display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602). In the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. If the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the big hit symbol pattern, and the small hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set.

  Next, the special figure displaying process shift setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure displaying process ends. That is, the game control device 100 forms a stop time setting unit that sets a stop time for displaying a stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Transition setting processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process shift setting process (step A603) in the above described special figure changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure display process transition setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number “2” related to the special figure displaying processing is set as the processing number (step A611), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A612).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 change is saved in the test signal output data area (step A613), and a signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 change is saved in the test signal output data area (step A614). The signal relating to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal. The signal relating to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

  Then, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for output in the external information terminal (step A615). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a stop flag relating to the change stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area ( Step A616) As a control information of the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, a stop flag relating to the stop of the variation in the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area. Then (step A617), the process shift setting process during special figure display is terminated.

[Processing during special map display]
Next, details of the special figure display processing (step A10) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the special figure displaying process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special figure display processing, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting processing in the special figure 1 change start processing is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step A701). Step A702).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), the information of the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined that it is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variable display game (the special figure 2) A signal relating to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), and a round number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit is a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal that turns on the signal that turns on the special symbol 2 Including.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2 (step A705; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A706). (Step A706; Y), the test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure change display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (Step A707), A number upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit is a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal that turns on the signal during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and a signal that turns on the signal per special symbol. Including.

  Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in the first embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, The data is saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command relating to information for setting the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the production command setting processing is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716). A717) is performed.

  Next, the special winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the state of the special winning opening information and the probability. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on when a big hit with a payout (the big win opening information is other than the big win opening information 1) is turned on, and a big hit without a payout (so-called sudden big hit, etc., big win opening). When the information is the special winning opening information 1), it is turned on when a big hit occurs during the time saving state, and turned off otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is turned on when there is a big hit with a payout, and turned off when the big hit has no payout.

  After that, the special winning opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are set. (Step A719), the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (Step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special map when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, information of the special winning opening illegal winning number area of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the special winning opening corresponding to the special winning opening information is cleared. The flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, a fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the processing for displaying a special figure is completed.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether or not the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).

  If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high-probability variation count updating process (step A726), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step A727) ) To determine whether or not the special figure high probability is in progress (the probability state of the special figure change display game is a high probability state) (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure high probability is not present (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure command area (step A729), and the production command setting processing is performed. (Step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure high probability is present (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733, and the subsequent processes are performed. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure change display game is the high probability state, the small winning occurrence opens the large winning prize, but the small winning occurrence occurs. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order not to make the player aware of.

  Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Then, the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high-probability variation count updating process (step A735), the effect mode information check process regarding the effect mode setting (step A735) A736), the remaining number of rotations for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining number of rotations for effect and the remaining rotation for switching preparation match (step A738). It should be noted that the switching preparation remaining rotation speed is a different value (rotation speed: for example, four times in mode A, three times in mode B, eight times in mode C, etc.) in all of the plurality of effect modes. May be the same value (the number of rotations) in any one of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value (the number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. ).

  If it is determined in step A738 that the effect remaining rotation speed does not match the switching preparation remaining rotation speed (step A738; N), the special figure ordinary process shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display is performed. The middle processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the production command setting is performed. After performing the processing (step A740), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure displaying process ends. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing a prefetch effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is effected across modes. Can be avoided.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update processing]
Next, details of the high-probability-variation-number updating process (steps A726 and A735) in the special figure displaying process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the high-probability-change-times updating process according to the first embodiment.

  In the high probability change frequency update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability is being performed (step A751). If the special figure high probability is not being performed (step A751; N), the high probability change frequency update process is performed. To end.

  If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A751; Y), the high probability change count for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state is updated by “−1” (step A752), It is determined whether the probability change frequency is “0” (step A753).

  If the number of times of high probability change is not “0” (step A753; N), the process of updating the number of times of high probability change is ended. If the number of high-probability changes is "0" (step A753; Y), the information in the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal relating to the end of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Step A755). Note that the signal regarding the high probability end is a signal for turning off the two big hit signals.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving (no high probability & time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A756). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal. In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the ordinary figure, the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A757), and the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A758).
Then, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A759), and the signal related to the left-hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1. Then, in order to turn off the display LED during the right-handed operation, the number during the left-handed operation is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A761), and the high-probability change frequency update process ends.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check processing (steps A727 and A736) in the special figure displaying processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect mode information check processing of the first embodiment.

  In the effect mode information check processing, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771; Y), The effect mode information check processing ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed in accordance with the number of executed special figure change display games, and, for example, an effect mode that continues to the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. It is.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A771; N), the effect remaining rotation speed, which is the number of executable times of the special figure change display game until the effect mode is changed, is updated by "-1" (step A772). ), It is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotation speed is “0” (step A773). The process of step A772 is a counting unit that counts the number of executions of the first special figure change display game and the second special figure change display game.

  If the effect remaining rotation speed is not “0” (step A773; N), the effect mode information check processing ends. If the effect remaining rotation speed is "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, an effect mode information address table is set (step A774). The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is obtained (step A775).

  The effect mode number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A776), and the remaining effect number of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the remaining effect number area (step A777). The effect mode to be shifted to (the effect mode at the shift destination) can be known from the next mode shift information already saved before step A776. Next mode transition information on the next production mode after the transition production mode is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A778). Note that the processing in step A776 is effect mode execution control means for performing execution control of one of a plurality of effect modes (game modes) in response to the counting result by the counting means (step A772). (Game mode execution control means).

  A probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A776 is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether or not the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area, that is, if the state of the probability does not change (step A780; Y), the effect mode is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 without transmitting the command. The information check processing ends. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A781), and the production command setting is performed. The processing (step A782) is performed.

  Then, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed acquired in step A777 is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed. Then, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed to determine whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A787).

  If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check processing ends. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), effect command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and effect mode information check is performed. The process ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792).

  Next, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A793). The signal related to the start of the big hit includes, for example, a signal that turns on one signal of the big hit (outputs with a big hit + a small hit) and a signal that turns on four signals of the big hit (outputs with a big hit).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the high probability & time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). The signal relating to the end of the high probability & shortening of time is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  After that, the information of the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the general-purpose game mode flag is set. The low probability flag is saved in the area (step A797).

  Then, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the information in the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of the high probability state (step A799). The special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area for saving a command output to the effect control device 300 when the power failure is restored (step A801), and the special figure variation that can be executed in the high probability state The information of the high-probability variation count area for managing the number of display games is cleared (step A802). Thereby, the high probability state and the time saving state are completed, and the state becomes the normal probability state and the normal state.

  Thereafter, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and since the game control device 100 manages the effect mode, the information of the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804). The non-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, a signal relating to the right-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handing is performed in the gaming state display number 2 area in order to light the display LED during right-handing. The number in the state is saved (step A807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 ends. As a result, the information of the effect mode is temporarily cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure display processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1, first, a processing number relating to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as a processing number (step A811), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A812). Then, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A814). The signal related to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal that turns on one signal of the big hit (outputs a big hit + a small hit).

  Then, the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815). The signal relating to the start of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

  Then, the information of the special winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step A816), and the illegal monitoring outside period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A817). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818). The signal related to the right strike instruction is, for example, a signal for turning on the firing position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn on the display LED for right-handed operation, the number for right-handed operation is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by "+1" (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A902). (Step A903) is performed.

  Thereafter, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is determined by the obtained opening switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).

  If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; Y), the opening time of the special winning opening for short opening (0.2s in the first embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. The game is saved (step A907), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A909) is performed to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A906; N), the opening time of the long winning opening for long opening (29s in the first embodiment) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A908), a special winning opening opening process shift setting process (Step A909) is performed to open the special winning opening, and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit patterns, (1) 4R, large winning opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening information 2 (all long opening), ( 3) 16R, big winning opening information 3 (1-4R is long opening, 5-16R is short opening), (4) 4R, big winning opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, big winning Open mouth information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, open winning opening information 6 (1-8R open long, 9-16R open short), (7) 16R, open winning opening information 7 (1) 4R is set to long open, and 5-16R is set to short open).

  Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the special winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are stored in the special winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the winning opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. When the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is performed such that the opening operation is long, and when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value, the opening operation is short opening.

(Grand prize opening opening process transition setting process)
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process (step A909) in the above-described fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process shift setting process according to the first embodiment.

  In the special winning opening processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number “4” related to the special winning opening processing is set as the processing number (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A912). Thereafter, a signal related to the start of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913). The signal relating to the start of opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening is cleared (step A914). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the processing setting setting for opening the special winning opening is ended.

(Processing while opening the big winning opening)
Next, the details of the special winning opening processing (step A12) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the processing during opening of the special winning opening according to the first embodiment.

  In the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine whether or not the current round is the last round. Is determined (step A1001).

  If it is the last round (step A1001; Y), the final ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and an ending command is prepared (step A1008). A1009), the process shifts to the process of step A1010, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If it is not the last round (step A1001; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and the number of rounds is reduced. It is determined whether the value exceeds the open switching determination value (A1004).

  When the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010 to perform the subsequent processes.

  If the number of rounds does not exceed the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006). Then, an interval command is prepared (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010 to perform the subsequent processes.

Thereafter, the effect command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, and the special winning opening processing is ended.
(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing transition setting processing)
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) in the above-described special winning opening processing during opening will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning port remaining sphere processing shift setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning port remaining ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number relating to the special winning port remaining ball processing, “5” is set as the processing number (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, the OFF data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the special winning opening remaining sphere processing transition setting processing ends.

(Grand prize mouth remaining ball processing)
Next, details of the special winning port remaining ball processing (step A13) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening remaining ball processing of the first embodiment.

  In the special winning port remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the last round. Is determined (step A1101).

  If it is the last round (step A1101; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1111), and the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information, and the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern ( For example, 1.9 s) is set (step A1112). Then, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1113), the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1114) is performed, and the special winning port remaining ball processing ends.

  If it is not the final round (step A1101; N), a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and an opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is obtained (step A1103). Then, a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 s) is set (step A1104), and it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105). In this case (step A1105; Y), the processing shifts to the processing of step A1109, and the subsequent processing is performed.

  If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening information is a value of a rank down staging system (step A1106). If it is not the value of the rank down effect system (Step A1106; N), the process proceeds to Step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the special winning opening opening information is a value of a rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a value of a special effect round (for example, 2R, 4R, 8R) ( In step A1107), if the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), an interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 s) is set (step A1108), and the process proceeds to step A1109. And the subsequent processing.

  Then, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing ends.

[Fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) in the above described special winning port remaining ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set as the processing number (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1122). Then, a signal regarding the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123). The signal relating to the end of the opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

Then, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is terminated.
[Big hit end process shift setting process]
Next, details of the big hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1114) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, the process number “6” relating to the big hit end process is set as the process number (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132).

  Then, a signal relating to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133). The signal relating to the end of the opening of the special winning opening is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, information in the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and information in the round number area storing the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1135). . Then, the information of the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136), and the information of the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared. Clear (step A1137). Then, the information of the special winning opening information area storing the special winning opening information determination flag is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end transition setting process ends.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the big hit end processing (step A14) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end processing of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end processing, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction determination data is time reduction operation data (step A1201). If it is not the time saving operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) is performed, and if it is the time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) is performed. .

  Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the time of the change start (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is obtained and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is obtained. The transfer information is acquired and saved in the next mode transfer information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1210), and effect command setting processing (step A1211) is performed.

  In addition, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that further include information on the effect mode in either “high probability / without time saving” or “no high probability / without time saving”. In the case of the first embodiment, when the big hit ends, the state always changes to a probable change state (a so-called ST state). Therefore, as the probability information command, “high probability / time reduction / effect mode A”, “high probability / time reduction / effect” There are "Mode B", "High-probability, no time-saving, effect mode C", and "High-probability, no time-saving, effect mode A", which are not used in this processing. , "Low probability, no time saving, effect mode B" and "Low probability, no time saving, effect mode C".

Next, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability-change-number command corresponding to the high-probability-change number is prepared (step A1214), and effect command setting processing (step A1215) is performed to determine whether or not a time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1215). A1216).

If the time-saving state occurs after the end of the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end processing ends.
If the time-saving state does not occur after the end of the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-turn instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after effect command setting processing (Step A1218) is performed, the special figure normal processing shifts. The setting process 2 (step A1219) is performed, and the big hit end process ends.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 1 (step A1202) in the above big hit end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the big hit end setting processing 1 of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the absence of a time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221). The signal relating to the absence of the time saving state is, for example, a signal for turning off the two big hit signals.

  Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time saving state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222). The signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the absence of the time reduction state is, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time. The signal includes a signal for turning off the shortened state signal, a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and a signal for turning off the ordinary symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, the number of no time saving state is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), the ordinary figure low probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1226), and the signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1.

Next, in order to extinguish the display LED during right strike, the number in left strike state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting processing 1 ends.
[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting processing 2 (step A1203) in the above big hit end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the jackpot end setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). The signal related to the start of the time-saving state is, for example, a signal that turns on two jackpot signals. The signal related to the start of the time saving state is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner since it is output from the big hit.

  Next, signals relating to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232). Signals related to the start of the high probability state and the time reduction state include, for example, a signal for turning on the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal for turning on the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal. , A signal for turning on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, and a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal.

  Next, the number of the time reduction state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the universal figure high probability flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability variation count area (step A1236), and the big hit end setting process 2 ends. In the case of the first embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state. However, since the right-handed mode is set during the big hit, the setting for the right-handed is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.

[Tokuzu ordinary processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) in the above-described big hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 2 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, “0”, which is the processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing, is set as the processing number (step A1241), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A124). A1242).

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The signal regarding the end of the big hit includes, for example, a signal for turning off one big hit, a signal for turning off three big hits, and a signal for turning off four big hits.

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). The signal relating to the end of the big hit includes a signal for turning off the signal during the operation of the condition device, a signal for turning off the signal for operating the continuous actor, a signal for turning off the signal per special symbol, and a signal for turning off the special symbol 2. Includes a signal that turns off the signal.

  Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1248), the irregularity monitoring period flag is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 2 is performed. To end.

[Treatment during small hit fanfare]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (step A15) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a view illustrating a flowchart of processing during the small hit fanfare of the first embodiment.

In the small hit fanfare middle process, the small hit middle process shift setting process (step A1301) is performed, and the small hit fanfare middle process ends.
[Small hit middle processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit mid-flight processing shift setting processing (step A1301) in the small hit fan-fare midway processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the small hit processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting middle processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number “8” related to the small hitting middle processing is set as the processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1312). ).

  Then, the small hit opening time (for example, 0.2 s) is set in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314). The signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning on the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315), and the information of the special winning opening count number area for storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. Clear (step A1316).

Then, the small hit operation initial value (for example, “0”) is saved in the small hit control pointer area (step A1317), and the small hit middle processing transition setting processing ends.
[Small hit processing]
Next, details of the small hitting medium processing (step A16) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the small hitting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hitting small process, first, the small hitting middle control pointer is loaded from the small hitting middle control pointer area (step A1401), and the value of the loaded small hitting middle control pointer is set to the small hitting operation end value (for example, "6"). It is determined whether or not the above is true (step A1402).

  If the value of the loaded small hit control pointer is not equal to or greater than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; N), the value of the small hit middle control pointer in the small hit middle control pointer area is updated by "+1" (step A1403). ), The small hit operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed, and the small hit mid-process is terminated. If the loaded small hit control pointer value is equal to or larger than the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is It is determined whether or not the figure is high (step A1406). Note that the determination in step A1406 determines a probability state as a determination target and does not determine a time reduction state.

  If the loaded flag is in the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), the process proceeds to step A1409, and the subsequent processes are performed. If the loaded flag is not in the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), a command for a small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and effect command setting processing (step A1408) is performed. Then, the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step 1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is terminated.

[Small hit operation shift setting process]
Next, details of the small hit operation transition setting processing (step A1404) in the small hit middle processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit operation shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit operation transition setting processing, first, the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is determined (step A1411). If the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is “0”, “2”, or “4” (step A1411; pointer = 0, 2, 4), the value of the small hit control pointer is changed to The corresponding wait time (1500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412). Then, the OFF data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation shift setting processing ends.

  If the value of the small hit control pointer loaded in step A1401 is "1", "3", or "5" (step A1411; pointer = 1, 3, 5), the value of the small hit control pointer is changed to The opening time (200 ms) of the corresponding special winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1414). Then, the ON data of the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation shift setting process ends.

  Here, the small hit operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a timing chart of the small hit operation of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointer.

  The small hit operation includes a small hit fanfare time (300 ms), a subsequent big winning opening opening time (200 ms), a subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), a subsequent big winning opening opening time (200 ms), and a subsequent waiting time. Time (1500 ms), a subsequent special winning opening time (200 ms), a subsequent waiting time (1500 ms), a subsequent special winning opening time (200 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (1900 ms). This is a series of operations for a total of 7600 ms including the small hit ending time (100 ms).

  In the case of the small hit operation, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the first winning opening time of the special winning opening, and the respective processes corresponding to the values of the control pointer from “0” to “5” are performed. The value of the control pointer becomes “6”. In this manner, in the case of the small hit operation, the small hit remaining ball processing is performed after the opening operation of the special variable winning device 38 four times. In the small hitting operation, by setting the small hitting ending time after the remaining ball processing time, an apparent ending time of 2000 ms obtained by adding the remaining small ball ending time of 1900 ms to the control small hitting ending time of 100 ms.

  In addition, during the small hit fan fare time, the wait time, the remaining ball processing time, and the small hit ending time, the special variable winning device 38 is closed by the off control of the large winning opening solenoid 38b. In addition, during the special winning opening time, the special variable winning device 38 is opened by controlling the special winning opening solenoid 38b to be on.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining sphere processing shift setting processing (step A1409) in the small hit medium processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing, first, the processing number relating to the small hit remaining ball processing, “9”, is set as the processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1421). Step A1422).

  Then, the small hitting remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) is turned off in the special winning opening solenoid output data area. The data is saved (step A1424), and the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing ends.

[Small hit ball processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit remaining ball processing according to the first embodiment.

In the small hit remaining sphere processing, the small hit end processing shift setting processing (step A1501) is performed, and the small hit remaining sphere processing ends.
[Small hit end processing shift setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing transition setting processing (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end processing shift setting processing of the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end process shift setting process, first, the process number “10” related to the small hit end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1512). ).

  Then, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514). The signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is, for example, a signal for turning off the special electric accessory 1 operating signal.

  Then, the information in the special winning opening count number area storing the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1515), the information in the small hit control pointer area is cleared to zero (step A1516), and the small hit end transition setting processing is performed. To end.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit end processing (step A18) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the small hit end processing according to the first embodiment.

  In the small hit end processing, first, a flag relating to a probability state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1601). A1602). If the flag loaded in step A1601 is in the special figure high probability (step A1602; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processes are performed.

  If the flag loaded in step A1601 is not in the special figure high probability (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect set at the start of the change (when the stop symbol is set). The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is obtained (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1605), the remaining effect rotational speed is acquired and saved in the remaining effect rotational speed area (step A1606), and the next mode transition information is acquired. The data is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1607).

  Then, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609). .

  If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619, and the subsequent processing is performed. If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1609; N), the probability information command is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1610), and the production command setting processing (step A1610) A1611).

  Then, an effect rotational speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotational speed acquired in step A1606 is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed. Further, a high probability variation number command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed to determine whether or not the new effect mode is a left-handed mode. (Step A1616).

  If the new effect mode is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and effect command setting processing (step A1618) is performed.

  Then, a flag relating to the time saving state is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether or not the flag loaded in step A1619 is during special figure time reduction (step A1620). If the flag loaded in step A1619 is during special figure time reduction (step A1620; Y), special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing ends.

  If the flag loaded in step A1619 is not during special figure time reduction (step A1620; N), a signal related to the left-handing instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1621). The signal related to the left-handing instruction is, for example, a signal for turning off the firing position designation signal 1.

  Then, in order to turn off the right-handed display LED, the left-handed state number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1622), and the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed. The hit end processing ends.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above small hit end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 3 of the first embodiment.

  In the special figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 3, first, "0" which is a processing number related to the special figure ordinary processing is set as a processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A163). A1632).

  Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634). The signal related to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off one signal of the big hit. The signal relating to the end of the small hit is, for example, a signal for turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal.

  Then, the information in the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag retreat area is cleared (step A1637), the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure ordinary processing transition setting processing 3 is executed. finish.

[Direction command setting processing]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in the above-described special figure game process subroutine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the effect command setting process of the first embodiment.

  In the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1701), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702). If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1702; Y), the process returns to step A1701. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1702; N), command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1703).

  Thereby, the effect command (MODE) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. In the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a two-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION", like an effect command, but may be configured in a larger byte configuration. In those cases, a flowchart corresponding to a multiple-byte configuration may be used.

Then, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A1704), and it is determined whether or not the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A1705; Y), the process returns to step A1704. If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A1705; N), the command data (ACTION) is written into the effect serial transmission buffer (step A1706), and the effect command setting process ends.

  By writing the command data (ACTION) into the effect serial transmission buffer, the effect command (ACTION) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100. Will be done.

  In this way, the effect command (MODE) and the effect command (ACTION) are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication. The effect control device 300 receives these commands and performs effect control on the screen of the display device 41 or the like. Since serial communication is performed using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100, there is an advantage that the configuration is simple.

[Symbol variation control processing]
Next, details of the symbol variation control process (step A22) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the symbol variation control process of the first embodiment.

  In the symbol change control process, first, a target change control flag is set and it is checked whether the symbol is changing (step A1801), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether the symbol is changing (step A1802). .

  If it is changing (step A1802; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the target symbol is acquired (step A1803). Then, the blink control timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the target symbol is updated by "-1" (step A1804), and it is determined whether or not the blink control timer is "0" (step A1805).

  If the blinking control timer is “0” (step A1805; Y), a blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target symbol and state is obtained (step A1806), and the blinking control timer initial value is set to the target symbol. The data is saved in the blink control timer area (step A1807). The blink control timer initial value will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the variable symbol number of the target symbol is updated by "+1" (step A1808), and the flow shifts to the process of step A1809. If the blink control timer is not “0” (step A1805; N), the process moves to step A1809.

  Then, display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the target symbol is acquired (step A1809), and the acquired display data is saved in the segment area of the target symbol (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process ends. I do.

  If it is not fluctuating in step A1802 (step A1802; N), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the target symbol is obtained (step A1810). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the target symbol is obtained (step A1811), and the obtained display data is saved in the target symbol segment area (step A1812), and the symbol variation control process ends. I do.

  In addition, on the fluctuation control table prepared in the special figure game process, information on the lower address of the fluctuation control area, the address of the display table 2 (for stopping), and the address of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined. I have.

[Flashing control timer initial value table]
Next, the details of the blink control timer initial value (step A1806) acquired in the above-described symbol variation control processing will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is an example of the blink control timer initial value table of the first embodiment. FIG.

The initial value of the blink control timer is set for each target symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, ordinary figure) and its state (state 1, state 2).
The initial value of the blink control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 1 and is 60 ms when the special figure 1 is in the state 2. Further, the initial value of the blink control timer is 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 1 and is 60 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2. In addition, the initial value of the blink control timer is 160 ms when the general figure is in the state 1 and is 120 ms when the general figure is in the state 2.

  Note that the initial value of the blink control timer is smaller than the value of the state 1 in the state 2 but is not limited thereto. The initial value of the blinking control timer may be larger than the value of the state 1 in the state 2. For example, the initial value of the blink control timer is 60 ms when Toku-zu 1 is in State 1, 80 ms when Toku-zu 1 is in State 2 and 60 ms when Toku-zu 2 is in State 1. The time may be 80 ms when the special figure 2 is in the state 2, 120 ms when the special figure is in the state 1, and 160 ms when the general figure is in the state 2.

  In addition, the state 2 is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the state 1, and a specific gaming state can be set for each gaming machine. For example, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is not in the probability fluctuation state, it corresponds to the state 1, and when the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is in the probability fluctuation state, the state 2 is set. Equivalent to.

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 uses the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55 in addition to the state display section 57 in the collective display device 50 to play the game of the gaming machine 10. The status can be displayed.

  In the collective display device 50, instead of the status display unit 57, the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is displayed by a special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, a special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and a general symbol display unit 55. Can also be displayed. For example, the gaming machine 10 performs the first state display on the state display unit 57 in the first period, performs the second state display on the state display unit 57 in the second period thereafter, and displays the special figure 1 symbol display. The first state display can be performed by the unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 notifies the game state transition (trigger notification) on the state display unit 57 at the time of the game state transition from the normal state to the probability fluctuation state or the like. In addition, when the gaming state such as the normal state or the probability variation state is the steady state, the gaming machine 10 displays the gaming state in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. Is in a steady state (steady state notification). Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to notify the gaming state using the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. The gaming machine 10 may notify the gaming state using one or two of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53, the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54, and the general symbol display unit 55. Further, the gaming machine 10 may notify a more complicated game state by a combination of the display modes of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. . Further, the gaming machine 10 notifies a more complicated game state by a combination of the display modes of the state display section 57, the special figure 1 symbol display section 53, the special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and the general symbol display section 55. It may be. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can notify a game progress that is easy for the player to understand.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the distribution processing according to the first embodiment.

  The distribution process selects the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1 or the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 Processing for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game and selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3 It is.

  In the distribution process, first, the prepared first-half variation group table (selection table), the second-half variation selection table (selection table), and the first data of the first-half variation selection table (selection table) have a code without distribution (that is, “0”). ) Is checked (step A1901), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without distribution (step A1902). Here, the second-half variation group table, the second-half variation selection table, and the first-half variation selection table store predetermined distribution values in association with at least one second-half variation pattern group, the second-half variation pattern, and the first-half variation pattern. In the case of a selection table that does not need to be assigned, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  If the first data of the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step A1902; Y), the code is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A1902; Y). (Step A1907), the distribution processing ends. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without sorting (step A1902; N), the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table First, one specified distribution value is acquired (step A1903).

  Subsequently, from the random number values (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in steps A473, A478, and A484 of the fluctuation pattern setting process, the distribution values acquired in step A1903 are obtained. After calculating a new random value by subtraction (step A1904), it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (step A1905; N), the address of the next distribution value is updated (step A1906), and the process returns to step A1903.

  That is, in step A1903, after the distribution values specified next in the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are acquired, the random number value determined in step A1905 is used as a new random number value. The distribution value is subtracted, and a new random value is calculated (step A1904). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A1905). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A1905; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern, and the first half variation pattern defined in the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table, Select a variation number or first half variation number. If it is determined in step A1905 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A1905; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step A1907), and the distribution process ends. I do.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, the details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A475) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the 2-byte distribution processing of the first embodiment.

  The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a second-half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second-half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1. As shown in FIG. 76, in the two-byte distribution processing, first, is the first data of the second half fluctuation group table (selection table) prepared in the fluctuation pattern setting processing a code without distribution (that is, “0”)? Is checked (step A2001), and as a result of the check, it is determined whether or not the leading data is a code without distribution (step A2002). Here, the second half variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half variation pattern group, but defines the second half variation pattern group in which the second half variation pattern is “no reach”. In a fluctuation group table (for example, some fluctuation group tables in a case where the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, and therefore, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top. .

  If the first data in the second half fluctuation group table is a code without allocation (step A2002; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the allocation result (step A2007), and the 2-byte allocation processing ends. I do. On the other hand, if the data at the head of the second half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A2002; N), one distribution value specified first in the second half variable group table is acquired (step A2003).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2003 from the random number value (the value of the variation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A473 of the variation pattern setting process (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005). If the new random number is not smaller than “0” (step A2005; N), the address of the next distribution value is updated (step A2006), and the process returns to step A2003. That is, in step A2003, after obtaining the distribution value specified next in the fluctuation group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted as the new random value using the determined random number in step A2005, and a new random value is obtained. A numerical value is calculated (step A2004). Then, it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y). As a result, one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table defined in the second-half variation group table. If it is determined in step A2005 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2005; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the allocation result (step A2007), and the 2-byte allocation process is performed. To end.

[Public figure game processing]
Next, the details of the general-purpose game process (step S130) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 77 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the general-purpose game process of the first embodiment. In the general-figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the general-figure change display game is controlled, and the setting of the general-figure display is performed.

  In the general game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general winning switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B2). Perform Next, if the ordinary game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the ordinary game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the general-purpose game processing timer has become “0” (step B4).

  If the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or the time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to a process corresponding to the general-purpose game processing number. A process (step B5) of setting a general-purpose game sequence branch table to be referred to in a register is performed, and a process (step B6) of acquiring a branch destination address of a process corresponding to the general-purpose game process number using the table is performed. . Then, a subroutine call (step B7) based on the game processing number is performed.

  In step B7, when the game processing number is "0", the start of the change of the ordinary figure change display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of the change of the ordinary figure change display game, the setting of the effect, and the processing during the change of the ordinary figure change game are performed. A general process (step B8) for setting information necessary for the operation is performed. If the game processing number is "1" in step B7, a general figure changing process (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process is performed.

  In step B7, if the game processing number is “2”, if the result of the normal figure change display game is a hit, setting of a general power release time according to whether or not the time saving state The general-drawing display process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the per-drawing middle process is performed. If the game processing number is "3" in step B7, the process is executed during the general drawing operation (step S7) in which the processing during the general drawing operation is continued, or information necessary for performing the ordinary electric ball remaining processing is set. B11) is performed.

  If the game processing number is "4" in step B7, a general electric remaining sphere processing (step B12) for setting information necessary for performing a general drawing end processing is performed. If the game processing number is "5" in step B7, a general figure end processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the general figure ordinary processing (step B8) is performed.

  Thereafter, a general symbol variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display is prepared (step B14), and a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol indicator (step B15). Is performed, and the ordinary figure game process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the general-purpose game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (step B102). Here, the game state of right-handing is during a big hit, during a small hit, or during special figure time reduction (general power support). In the case of the game state of right-handing (step B102; Y), the processing shifts to step B105. When the game state is not the right-handed game state (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), an effect command setting process (step B104) is performed, the number of ordinary drawing reservations is acquired, and the ordinary drawing reservation number is acquired. Is smaller than the upper limit (for example, “4”) (step B105).

  If the number of ordinary drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of ordinary drawing reservations is updated by "+1" (step B106), and the address of the hit random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of ordinary drawing reservations is changed. It is calculated (step B107). Then, the winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process ends.

  Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of ordinary drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N). Then, the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 79 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the normal winning switch monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In this general-purpose winning switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal-variation winning display device is in the hit state and the normal-variation winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. Is determined (step B111). Then, when the vehicle is in the normal position (step B111; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112), and if there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; Y). If it is determined, the count value of the ordinary power counter is updated by "+1" (step B113).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated ordinary telephone counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, “6”) (step B114), and when the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B114; Y). When it is determined, based on the fact that the count value of the ordinary power counter has reached the upper limit, the value of the operation end (for example, “4”) is saved as a process for closing the ordinary power in the normal pointer per hit control pointer area ( (Step B115), the general-purpose game processing timer is cleared to zero (step B116), and the general-purpose winning switch monitoring process ends. In other words, if there is a general prize winning equal to or greater than the upper limit during the hit state of the general figure, the value of the hit end is saved in the normal figure hitting processing control pointer area at that time, and To end.

  Also, when it is determined in step B111 that the vehicle is not in the ordinary drawing mode (step B111; N), when it is determined in step B112 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B112; N) or step B114 When it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B114; N), the normal power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

(Normal map everyday processing)
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B8) in the aforementioned ordinary figure game processing will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ordinary processing in the first embodiment. In this ordinary drawing ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary drawing reservations is “0” (step B121), and if the number of ordinary drawing reservations is “0” (step B121; Y), The figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B141) is performed, and the ordinary figure ordinary processing ends. If the number of reserved symbols is not "0" (step B121; N), the random number is loaded from the winning random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) (step B122). Then, the hit random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and the winning symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) are cleared to zero (step B123).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability of a winning result in the general-floor variation display game is higher than the normal probability, ie, whether the game is in a time-saving state (step B124). If it is not during the general figure high probability (step B124; N), a low probability lower limit determination value is set (step B125). If it is during the general figure high probability (step B124; Y), the high probability lower limit determination value is set. It is set (step B126). The low probability upper limit determination value and the high probability upper limit determination value are common values (for example, “251”). The low-probability lower-limit determination value and the high-probability-lower-limit determination value are different values (for example, the low-probability-lower-limit determination value is “251” and the high-probability-lower-limit determination value is “1”). The high-probability lower-limit judgment value is a small value in comparison. As a result, the hit probability increases at high probabilities as compared to low probabilities, for example, 0/251 for low probabilities and 250/251 for high probabilities.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the hit random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127). If the hit random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; N), whether or not the hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value is determined. Is determined (step B128). In step B127, if the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (step B127; Y), or in steps B127 and B128, if the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step B127; N, step B128; Y), In the case of a loss, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (step B129), the loss stop symbol number is set (step B130), and the loss symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B131). Also, in steps B127 and B128, when the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value and equal to or larger than the lower limit judgment value, that is, in the case of a hit (step B127; N, step B128; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area ( (Step B132), a hit stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded hit symbol random number is set (step B133), and stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in a general symbol stop symbol information area (step B134). In the first embodiment, there are three types of winning symbols.

  Next, the stop symbol number is saved in the ordinary symbol stop symbol area (step B135), and the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B136). Thereafter, the random number storage area per ordinary figure is shifted (step B137), the empty area after the shift is cleared to zero (step B138), and the reserved number of ordinary figures is updated by "-1" (step B139). In other words, with the execution of the general-figure variation display game relating to the oldest general-family reservation number 1, the ranks of the general-family reservation numbers “2” to “4” that are on hold after the general-family reservation number “1” Are carried out one by one. By this processing, the value for the number of ordinary figure reservations 2 to the number of ordinary figure reservations 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is moved from the number 1 for ordinary figure retention to the number 3 for ordinary figure retention in the random number storage area per ordinary figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved ordinary figure 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the reserved number of ordinary figure is decremented by “1”.

Then, a normal-figure-change processing transition setting processing (step B140) is performed, and the normal-figure normal processing ends.
[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B141) in the ordinary figure ordinary processing described above will be described. FIG. 81 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the general-purpose ordinary process shift setting process 1 of the first embodiment. In the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1, first, "0" is set as the processing number for shifting to the ordinary figure ordinary processing (step B151), and the processing number is saved in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B151). B152). After that, the flag during the illegal monitoring period is saved in the ordinary telephone irregularity monitoring period flag area (step B153), and the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 ends.

[Process shift setting process during normal fluctuation]
Next, the details of the normal-figure-change processing transition setting processing (step B140) in the normal-figure normal processing described above will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process of setting transition to processing during normal-figure fluctuation according to the first embodiment. In the normal figure change processing transition setting processing, first, "1" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure change processing (step B161), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area ( (Step B162), the normal figure fluctuation time (common to the low probability and the high probability (for example, 500 ms)) is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B163). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B164). Note that the signal related to the start of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a signal for turning on the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal.

  Next, a fluctuating flag indicating that the general-figure fluctuation display game is fluctuating is saved in the general-figure fluctuation control flag area (step B165). Then, the initial value of the blink control timer (for example, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the blink period timer of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blink control timer area (step B166), and the ordinary figure change process transition setting processing is performed. finish.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, the general figure changing process (step B9) in the general figure game processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the processing during the ordinary figure fluctuation of the first embodiment. In the normal figure changing process, a normal figure displaying process shift setting process (step B171) is performed, and the normal figure changing process ends.

[Transfer setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general-figure display processing transition setting processing (step B171) in the above-described general-figure fluctuation processing will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process-setting-for-process-in-general-drawing-mode process setting process according to the first embodiment. In the normal figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the normal diagram display process (step B181), and the process number is set in the general figure game process number area. Save (step B182). After that, the general-purpose display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B183). Further, a signal relating to the end of the change in the ordinary figure is saved in the test signal output data area (step B184). The signal related to the end of the change of the ordinary figure is a signal for turning off the signal during the normal change of the symbol 1.

Next, a stop flag indicating that the general-figure change display game is stopped is saved in the general-figure change control flag area (step B185), and the normal-figure display process shift setting processing ends.
[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the general figure display processing (step B10) in the above general figure game processing will be described. FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the process during normal-drawing display according to the first embodiment. In the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or out-of-position information) set in the normal figure normal processing is loaded (step B191), and the information of the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared (step B192). ), It is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B193).

  If the hit flag is not the hit information (step B193; N), the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 1 (step B198) for shifting to the ordinary figure ordinary processing is performed, and the ordinary figure displaying processing ends. The normal-drawing-normal-process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B193; Y), a hitting process setting table is set (step B194).

  Then, a hit start pointer value (one of the control pointers “0”, “2”, and “4”) corresponding to the normal symbol stop symbol information is obtained, and saved in the normal pointer hit symbol control pointer area (step B195). The general-purpose release time (500 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B196). Thus, the opening mode of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 during the time saving state is set, and for example, the opening can be performed four times. After that, a normal-drawing-per-middle-process-in-migration setting process (step B197) is performed, and the normal-drawing-middle-display-in-progress process ends.

[Middle-time process shift setting process]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal-per-figure process (step B197) in the above-described general-floor display process will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process-setting-for-medium-time-period transition setting process of the first embodiment. In this process, the process number is set to "3" (step B201), and the process number is saved in the general game process number area. (Step B202). After that, a signal related to the start of the normal figure change display game (a signal related to the normal figure change display game) and a signal related to the start of the normal power operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B203). Note that the signal related to the start of the normal figure variation display game is a signal for turning on the normal signal per symbol design, and the signal related to the start of the general power operation is a signal for turning on the normal electric accessory 1 active signal. It is.

Next, ON data is saved in a general-purpose solenoid output data area to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general-purpose solenoid (step B204).
Further, the information in the general telephone count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variable prize device 37 is cleared (step B205), and the general illegal winning device for storing the number of prizes to the normal variable prize device 37 during the general illegal unauthorized monitoring period. The information of the winning number area is cleared (step B206). Then, a flag defining the outside of the irregularity monitoring period of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is saved in the ordinary telephone irregularity monitoring period flag area (step B207), and the process for setting the normal-principle-per-middle processing transition is ended.

[Medium processing per drawing]
Next, a detailed description will be given of the during-normal-drawing process (step B11) in the above-described general-purpose game processing. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process during the ordinary hitting operation in the first embodiment. In this routine processing, the control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B211), and the value of the loaded control pointer is set to the value of the control pointer upper limit area in the routine control. It is determined whether or not (the value of the hit end) has been reached (step B212).

  If the value of the control pointer during normal operation does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit area during normal operation (step B212; N), the control pointer during normal operation is updated by "+1" (step B213). Then, the normal power operation shift setting process (step B214) is performed, and the normal time hitting process ends. When the value of the control pointer during the ordinary figure reaches the value of the upper limit value area of the control pointer during the ordinary figure (the value of the hit end) (step B212; Y), the control passes the step B213 and sets the transition to the ordinary power operation. The processing (step B214) is performed, and the processing during the ordinary drawing ends.

(Privilege operation transition setting process)
Next, the details of the ordinary power operation shift setting process (step B214) in the above-described ordinary diagram hitting process will be described. FIG. 88 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary power operation shift setting process of the first embodiment. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer. In the normal power operation shift setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B221).

  When the value of the control pointer is either “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to Step B222. That is, in order to control the closing of the ordinary variable prize device 37, the wait time (for example, 200 ms) after the closing of the ordinary variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B222). The off-data is saved in the general-purpose solenoid output data area to turn off the general-purpose solenoid 37c (step B223), and the general-purpose operation shift setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is one of "1" and "3", the flow shifts to step B224. That is, in order to control the opening of the normal variable prize device 37, the normal power open time (for example, 1700 ms), which is the open time of the normal variable prize device 37 corresponding to the control pointer, is saved in the general game processing timer area (step B224) The ON data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn on the general power solenoid 37c (step B225), and the general power operation shift setting process ends.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4", the flow shifts to step B226. That is, "4" is set as the processing number (step B226) in order to end the opening control of the ordinary fluctuation prize device 37 and perform the ordinary electric remaining ball processing (step B12). Then, this processing number is saved in the general-purpose game processing number area (step B227), and the general electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B228). After that, the off data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area to turn off the general power solenoid 37c (step B229), and the general power operation shift setting process ends.

  Next, the ordinary power operation in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a view showing a general power operation timing chart of the ordinary variable prize device of the first embodiment. The numbers in the squares in the figure indicate the values of the control pointer.

  The normal power operation in the case of the winning symbol 1 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a total of 1200 ms including a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (500 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). Is a series of operations. In the case of the hit symbol 1, the value of the control pointer becomes “4” after the elapse of the ordinary power release time, and the ordinary power winning sphere device 37 performs the ordinary power remaining sphere processing after one opening operation.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the hit symbol 2 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed in a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait time (200 ms). This is a series of operations for a total of 4800 ms, including the normal power release time (1700 ms) and the remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 2, the value of the control pointer becomes “2” after the first ordinary power release time has elapsed, and the control pointer value goes through the respective processes corresponding to “2” and “3”. The value of the pointer becomes “4”. In this manner, in the case of the hit symbol 2, the normal-power remaining sphere process is performed after the two-time opening operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37.

  In addition, the normal power operation in the case of the hit symbol 3 in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is performed by a normal symbol display time (600 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), and a subsequent wait time (200 ms). This is a series of operations of a total of 6700 ms including a normal power release time (1700 ms), a subsequent wait time (200 ms), a subsequent normal power release time (1700 ms), and a remaining ball processing time (600 ms). In the case of the hit symbol 3, the value of the control pointer becomes “0” after the elapse of the first ordinary power release time, and the values of the control pointer correspond to “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. Through the respective processes, the value of the control pointer becomes “4”. In this way, in the case of the hit symbol 3, the ordinary-power remaining sphere processing is performed after the opening operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 three times.

  During the normal figure display time, the wait time, and the remaining ball processing time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is closed by the off control of the normal electric solenoid 37c. In addition, during the normal power release time, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by the ON control of the general power solenoid 37c.

(Puden residual sphere treatment)
Next, the ordinary power remaining sphere process (step B12) in the above ordinary figure game process will be described. FIG. 90 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary electric remaining sphere processing of the first embodiment. In the ordinary power remaining sphere processing, the ordinary figure end processing shift setting processing (step B231) is performed, and the ordinary power remaining sphere processing is ended.

[Private figure end processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing shift setting processing (step B231) in the above-described general electric remaining sphere processing will be described. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the per-figure end processing transition setting processing according to the first embodiment. In the general figure end processing transition setting processing, first, a processing number “5” relating to the general figure end processing is set (step B241), and the processing number is saved in the general figure game processing number area (step B242). ).

  Thereafter, the general-purpose ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (step B243), and a signal relating to the end of the operation of the normal variable prize device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B244). The signal related to the end of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is a signal for turning off the normal electric auditors product 1 operating signal.

  Next, the information in the ordinary telephone count number area for counting the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B245). Then, the value of the control pointer area during the per-chart is cleared (step B246), and the per-chart end processing transition setting process ends.

[End processing per map]
Next, an explanation will be given of the end process (step B13) in the above-described general map game process. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the per-figure end processing according to the first embodiment. In the per-figure-per-draw end processing, the per-figure per-day processing transition setting processing 2 (step B251) is performed, and the per-figure per perigraph end processing is terminated.

[Normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 (step B251) in the above ordinary figure end processing will be described. FIG. 93 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2 of the first embodiment. In the ordinary figure ordinary processing shift setting processing 2, first, a processing number “0” relating to the ordinary figure ordinary processing is set (step B261), and the processing number is saved in the ordinary figure game processing number area (step B262). .

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the hit in the normal figure changing game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B263). Note that the signal relating to the end of the hit in the normal figure fluctuation game is a signal for turning off the signal during the normal fluctuation of the symbol 1.

  After that, a flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is saved in the flag area for fraud monitoring during the fraudulent operation (step B264), and the process for setting the normal processing to normal processing transition 2 ends. .

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S131) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the segment LED editing process according to the first embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, settings related to the driving of the LEDs constituting the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, the general view reservation display unit 56, and the status display unit 57 provided in the collective display device 50 are performed. Perform

In the segment LED editing processing, first, “1” is added to the blink control timer to update the timer (step C11). The blink control timer is, for example, an 8-bit counter timer.
Next, the output on-timing of the general-purpose pending display is determined (step C12), and if it is the output-on timing (step C12; Y), the general-purpose pending number display table 1 is set (step C13), and the output on-timing is set. If it is not (step C12; N), the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2 is set (step C14). The determination of the output on-timing of the general-purpose hold display can be made by referring to a specific bit of the timer. For example, a blinking period of 128 ms can be set by referring to the fifth bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms.

  After that, the display data corresponding to the number of ordinary figure reservations is acquired from the set ordinary figure reservation number display table 1 or the ordinary figure reservation number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C15). The segment area is a storage area for storing display data of LED_00 to LED_31.

  For example, the number-of-regular-pending-number display table 1 and the number-of-regular-pending-number display table 2 have the same value for the number of ordinary figure-reserved numbers “0” to “2” and different values for the number of reserved general-purpose numbers “3” and “4” It is. As a result, the corresponding LED is turned off with the number of reserved general figures “0”, the corresponding LED is lit with the number of reserved general figures “1” and “2”, and the number of reserved general figures “3” is displayed on the general figure reservation display unit 56. , "4" realizes blinking of the corresponding LED.

  Next, the output ON timing of the special figure 1 hold display is determined (step C16), and if it is the output ON timing (step C16; Y), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (step C17), and the output is performed. If it is not the ON timing (step C16; N), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C18). The determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 1 hold display can be performed in the same manner as the determination of the output on-timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms from the general-purpose display, a blinking cycle different from that of the general-purpose display can be set.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired from the set special figure 1 hold number display table 1 or the special figure 1 hold number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C19). In addition, the lighting mode of the LED is also realized in the special figure 1 display section 52 in the same manner as in the general figure display section 56.

  Next, the output ON timing of the special figure 2 suspension display is determined (step C20), and if it is the output ON timing (step C20; Y), the special figure 2 suspension number display table 1 is set (step C21), and the output is performed. If it is not the ON timing (step C20; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step C22). Note that the determination of the output on-timing of the special figure 2 hold display can be performed in the same manner as the determination of the output on-timing of the general figure hold display. At this time, for example, by changing the reference bit of the timer that is incremented by one every 4 ms from the general-purpose display, a blinking cycle different from that of the general-purpose display can be set.

  Thereafter, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension number is acquired from the set special figure 2 suspension number display table 1 or the special figure 2 suspension number display table 2, and saved in the segment area (step C23). It should be noted that the lighting state of the LED is also realized in the special figure 2 holding display section 58 in the same manner as in the general figure holding display section 56.

  Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 51 is defined is set (step C24), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area (step C25). .

Next, the game status display table 1 is set (step C26), display data corresponding to the game status display number 1 is obtained, and saved in the segment area (step C27).
The gaming state display table 1 indicates whether the gaming state of the special figure game is during the time saving period (during regular power support), in other words, whether or not it is one of the gaming states advantageous to the player. A display mode for notification by the display unit 57 is defined. For example, when the LED_29 of the status display unit 57 is turned off, “normal” is notified, and when the LED_29 is turned on, “special figure time reduction (general power support)” is notified.

  Thereafter, the game status display table 2 is set (step C28), the display data corresponding to the game status display number 2 is obtained, saved in the segment area (step C29), and the segment LED editing process ends.

  The game state display table 2 indicates whether or not the game state of the special figure game is a right-handed game state, in other words, whether or not it is another game state advantageous to the player. Defines the display mode for notification. For example, when the LED_30 of the status display unit 57 is turned off, “normal hit (left-handed)” is notified, and when LED_30 is turned on, “right-handed” is notified. It should be noted that the period of notifying “right-handed” includes a period corresponding to a gaming state such as a big hit, a small hit, and a general power support.

  Thus, the segment LED editing process can notify the player of the progress of the game according to the set display mode. Therefore, the round display unit 51, the special figure 1 reservation display unit 52, the special figure 2 reservation display unit 58, the general figure reservation display unit 56, the state display unit 57 has a function as a game progress notification unit.

  Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process and a board radio fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraudulent activities will be described. A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game value to a player according to the result of the game may be fraudulently attempted to illegally obtain the game value. Among such fraudulent acts, a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for detecting a fraudulent act using a magnet has been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent activities, and detection methods and conditions corresponding to each type are required. However, the occurrence of an abnormal state could not be accurately detected.

  In particular, erroneously determining that an abnormal state has occurred even though an abnormal state leading to wrongdoing has not occurred, and performing a notification or the like causes a player's distrust and a repelling factor of the game in the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important to prevent erroneous detection of such an abnormal state.

  Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 accurately detects the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection results of the magnetic detector for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. For example, in order to prevent erroneous detection of an abnormal state, the following illegal magnet monitoring process and illegal panel radio wave monitoring process are performed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring processing]
First, the magnet illegal monitoring process (step S132) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process according to the first embodiment. In the magnet unauthorized monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 serving as a magnetic detector for detecting an abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. Since the magnetic detector functions as a magnet detector that detects the approach of a magnet, the magnetic sensor can be rephrased as a magnet sensor.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, based on the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), whether the magnetic sensor is on, that is, whether abnormal magnetism is detected. It is determined whether or not it is (Step C31). If the magnetic sensor is ON (step C31; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, “1” is added to the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the period of detecting abnormal magnetism and updated (step C32). ), It is determined whether or not the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has expired (step C33).

  If the magnet irregularity monitoring timer times out (step C33; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period (for example, 32 ms), abnormality is determined. When abnormality is determined, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C34), and the magnet fraud reporting timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud reporting timer area (step C35). Then, a command for magnet impropriety notification is prepared (Step C36), a magnet improper occurrence flag is prepared as a magnet improper flag (Step C37), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet improper flag matches the value of the magnet improper flag area. A determination is made (step C43).

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as an abnormal state detection control unit that detects an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic sensor. Then, the game control device 100 determines that an abnormal state has occurred when the magnetic sensor continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period.

  On the other hand, if the magnetic sensor is not turned on (step C31; N), that is, if abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C38), and the magnet fraud notification that defines the magnet fraud notification time period. If the timer is not "0", "1" is subtracted from the magnet improper notification timer and updated (step C39). Note that the minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is “0” (Step C40). When the timer for monitoring unauthorized access to the magnet has not expired (step C33; N), the process also proceeds to step C39.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not “0” (step C40; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. When the value of the magnet fraudulent notification timer is “0” (Step C40; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired and the period of the fraudulent notification has ended, or In the case where the fraudulent notification has not been performed from step (1), a command to end magnet fraudulent notification is prepared (step C41). Further, a magnet invalid flag is prepared as a magnet invalid flag (step C42), and it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value of the magnet invalid flag area (step C43).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C43; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C43; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C44), effect command setting processing is performed (step C45), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing ends. I do.

(Panel radio fraud monitoring processing)
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S133) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process of the first embodiment. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 serving as a radio wave detector for detecting an abnormal radio wave, and the start and end of fraudulent notification are set.

  In the panel radio wave monitoring process, first, the panel radio sensor is turned on based on the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, That is, it is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (step C51). If the panel radio wave sensor is on (step C51; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C52).

  Then, a command for informing the radio wave fraudulent information is prepared (step C53), and a fraudulent radio wave occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step C54). It is determined whether they match (step C59). That is, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when abnormal radio waves are detected, unlike the case of magnetic fraud.

  That is, the game control device 100 has a function as abnormal state detection control means for detecting occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the panel radio wave sensor. Then, the game control device 100 is configured to determine that an abnormal state has occurred only by detecting the abnormal radio wave once by the board radio wave sensor.

  On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not turned on (step C51; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that specifies the radio wave fraud notification time is not "0" unless the radio wave fraud notification is performed. "1" is subtracted from the timer and updated (step C55). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is “0” (step C56).

  If the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not "0" (step C56; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the panel radio frequency irregularity monitoring process ends. When the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step C56; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired and the period of the fraud notification has ended, or If no illegal notification has been issued from step (1), a command for ending the radio wave fraudulent notification is prepared (step C57), and a fraudulent radio wave release flag is prepared as a fraudulent radio wave flag (step C58). It is determined whether or not the flag matches the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area (step C59).

  If the prepared panel radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the panel radio wave fraud flag area (step C59; Y), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step C59; N), the prepared panel radio wave illegal flag is saved in the panel radio illegal flag area (step C60), and a production command setting process is performed (step C61). The process ends.

  By performing the above-described magnet fraud monitoring processing and panel radio wave fraud monitoring processing, the occurrence of an abnormal state can be accurately detected. That is, although a gaming machine is provided with a component that generates magnetism such as a solenoid, when the magnetism is detected continuously for a predetermined period, it is determined that the state is abnormal, so that the magnetism generated by the solenoid or the like is determined. The occurrence can be prevented from being erroneously detected as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not provided with a component that emits a radio wave, it is possible to minimize damage by immediately determining an abnormal state when detecting an abnormal radio wave.

  In the first embodiment, the detection of the abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which the magnetism is detected. However, the detection of the abnormal magnetism may be a state in which the magnetism is stronger than the magnetic state in the non-abnormal state. The state where the magnetism is detected may be regarded as abnormal. Further, in the first embodiment, the detection of the abnormal radio wave is merely a state in which the radio wave is received. However, the detection of the radio wave of an intensity that is not received in the non-abnormal state or the reception of the radio wave in the non-abnormal state is not performed. It may be in a state of receiving radio waves with no frequency. Further, a state where a radio wave whose intensity is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave of a specific frequency is detected may be regarded as abnormal. When the threshold is set based on the strength of the magnetic field, the strength of the radio wave, and the frequency, a signal may be output when the magnetic sensor 61 or the panel radio wave sensor 62 exceeds the threshold, or the threshold may be set on the control device side. You may monitor whether it exceeded.

  From the above, the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor 61) for detecting abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (panel radio wave sensor 62) for detecting abnormal radio waves, and the detection results of the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector And an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting occurrence of an abnormal state. In the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism over a predetermined period. In this case, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. In the case of a radio wave detector, however, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only by detecting an abnormal radio wave once.

[External information editing processing]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. FIG. 97 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment. FIG. 98 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating a flowchart of the external information editing process of the first embodiment.

  In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning port switch / state monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the panel radio fraud monitoring process (step S133) On the basis of this, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

  In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to an error state or a security state, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door / frame is set. The ON data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error are output as external information and a test signal.

  On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C71). C75), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

  Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not “0”, the security signal control timer is updated to “−1”. (Step C77). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (Step C78).

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, the process of step C79 is passed. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information until the security signal control timer times out.

  Magnet fraud (step C80; Y), panel radio fraud (step C81; Y), frame radio fraud (step C82; Y), ordinary fraud (step C83; Y), or grand prize When the illegal operation is occurring (Step C84; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (Step C85), and the gaming machine error state signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86).

  On the other hand, if none of the illegal magnets, illegal radio waves in the board, illegal radio waves in the frame, illegal in the ordinary telephone, or illegal in the special winning opening (steps C80 to C84; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is tested. The data is saved in the signal output data area (step C87).

  Next, in the external information editing process, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting port signal editing process for editing a winning signal of the starting port (step C89). Perform Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of executions of the special figure change display game is not “0”, “−1” is updated (step C90). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is “0” (step C91).

  When the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step C91; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination number signal is stored in the external information output data area. Save (step C92) and end the external information editing process. If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step C91; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C91). C93), the external information editing process ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C88) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the main prize ball signal editing process according to the first embodiment. The main prize ball signal editing process is a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). Is output to an external device.

  In the main award ball signal editing process, first, if the main award ball signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is “0” (step C102; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is “0” (step C103).

  If the main award ball signal output count is not "0" (step C103; N), the main award ball signal output count is updated to "-1" (step C104), and the main award ball signal output control timer area is set to the main award ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the award ball signal output control timer is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the ON state (eg, high level) time (eg, 128 ms) and the OFF state (eg, low level) time (eg, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. Time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process ends. If the number of times of output of the main prize ball signal is 0 (step C103; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C103). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main award ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; N), it is determined whether or not the main award ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C106; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output ON period (step C106; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

  Through the above processing, information on the planned number of game medium payouts is transmitted to the outside. After the payout condition based on the winning of the game ball is satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to complete the payout of the game ball by operating the payout device. From the establishment of the payout condition to the payout of the number of game media to be paid out, information on the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside.

  That is, the game control device 100 can output information on the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout of the number of game media to be paid out. External output means.

  However, if the number of generated prize balls is small and this value is less than a predetermined number (for example, 10) even if it is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area, after the actual payout is completed, information on the scheduled number of game medium payouts May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of game medium payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, to “1”), the payout condition is always satisfied and the payout number of game media is paid out. In the meantime, it is possible to output information on the number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside.

  In view of the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In the gaming machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 200), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out after the payout condition is satisfied and before the payout number of game media is paid out. An external output unit (game control device 100) capable of outputting information on the number of scheduled game medium payouts to the outside is provided. Note that it is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine by using a game medium as a medal.

  The external output means (game control device 100) includes a storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of planned game medium payouts which have not been output to the outside, based on establishment of a payout condition. An adding means (game control device 100) for adding the planned game medium payout number corresponding to the established payout condition to the game medium storage area, and the planned game medium payout number stored in the game medium storage area reaches a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of planned game medium payouts to the outside, and subtracting the predetermined number of planned game medium payouts transmitted by the transmission means from the game medium storage area. Subtraction means (game control device 100).

Here, the transmission timing of the main prize ball signal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a transmission timing chart of the main prize ball signal of the first embodiment.
For example, the game control device 100 outputs one pulse (main prize ball signal) every time a predetermined unit number (for example, 10) of game media is to be paid out. The output signal of the main prize ball signal rises from “OFF” to “ON” when the value of the output control timer is “48”, and “ON” to “OFF” when the value of the output control timer is “16”. And keeps “OFF” until the value of the output control timer becomes “0”. That is, the output signal of the main prize ball signal is a pulse signal of 192 ms including an “ON” time of 128 ms and an “OFF” time of 64 ms.

  The payout control device 200, unlike the game control device 100, outputs one pulse (prize ball signal) every time a predetermined number of game media (for example, 10) are paid out. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the external device confirm the match between the game medium payout schedule and the game medium payout result, and can deal with the illegal payout.

  In addition, in the prize during the jackpot period, when the payout of the game medium is delayed due to lack of ball, etc., and the game medium is paid out after the end of the big hit, the external device, only the prize ball signal output by the payout control device 200, It was not possible to determine whether or not the payout was based on winnings during the jackpot period. However, the game control device 100 outputs an main prize ball signal so that an external device (for example, a hall computer) can accurately collect (determine) information.

(Start port signal editing process)
Next, details of the opening signal editing process (step C89) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the start-up port signal editing processing according to the first embodiment. The starting port signal editing process is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

  In the opening signal editing process, first, if the starting signal output control timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step C111). Note that the minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the starting port signal output control timer is “0” (Step C112). When the value of the starting port signal output control timer is “0” (Step C112; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of starting port signal outputs is “0” (Step C113).

  If the number of times of starting port signal output is not "0" (step C113; N), the number of times of starting port signal output is updated to "-1" (step C114), and the starting port signal output control timer area outputs the starting port signal output. The control timer initial value is saved (step C115). The initial value of the starting port signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the ON state (eg, high level) and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the OFF state (eg, low level) of the starting port signal (eg, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, the ON data for turning on the start-up port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start-up port signal editing process ends. If the start port signal output count is “0” (step C113; Y), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C113). C118), the start-up signal editing process ends.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting port signal output control timer is not “0” (Step C112; N), it is determined whether or not the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON section (Step C116). The starting port signal output control timer being in the output ON period means that the value of the starting port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the starting port signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step C116; Y), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output ON section (step C116; N), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), end the start-up signal editing process.

  Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described. The special figure controlled by the effect control device 300 is a special effect figure displayed on the display device 41, and the special figure in the following description of the control processing of the effect control device 300 is the special figure for the effect. (Decorative design that is not this special map).

[Main processing]
First, the main process of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the main process in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits the interruption.

[Step D12] The control unit performs initialization of the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit performs an initial setting of the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interruption.

  [Step D15] The control unit permits display data generation. That is, the control unit permits a display circuit (not shown) in the VDP 312 to access a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

  [Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument to be given to the srand function, or use a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. May be.

  [Step D17] The control unit initializes an area to be initialized in the RWM (for example, the RAM 322) of the effect control device 300 (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags to be described later in control processing of the effect control apparatus 300)). Save the initial value at power-on in).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT.
[Step D19] The control unit executes an effect button input process. The effect button input process is a process for performing editing when the effect buttons (selection button switch 25a and decision button switch 25b) are operated when they are enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at a high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button in the effect button input process, or may execute the process in a short period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

  [Step D20] The control unit executes a hall / player setting mode process. The hall / player setting mode process is a process of setting a changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41, and accepting an operation by the player to change the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41 and the like.

  [Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is a process of updating a pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process using a rand function, for example. Since the rand function generates a random number each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain a random number only by executing the rand function. Note that a counter that increments by “1” like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as a random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes a received command check process. The received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D22A] The control unit executes power saving control processing. The power saving control process performs switching control between a normal control state (non-power saving control state) in which power consumption of the power saving control target device is not suppressed and a power saving control state in which power consumption of the power saving control target device is suppressed. Processing.

  [Step D23] The control unit performs an effect display editing process. The effect display editing process is a process of setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. For example, the control unit sets the commands in a table form in the effect display editing process.

  [Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is processing for setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing processing has been completed.

  [Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is a frame switching timing, and if it is a frame switching timing, proceeds to step D26, and if not a frame switching timing, waits for a frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 sec ≒ 33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 sec) of the V blank interrupt (also referred to as V sync interrupt). It is the timing of arrival at the target interval. Note that the V blank interrupt is generated each time one scan of the entire screen for drawing by the VDP 312 is completed. The generation cycle of the V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and a V blank interrupt occurs twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is twice the cycle of the V blank interrupt (for example, 1/60 second). (For example, 1/30 seconds ≒ 33.33 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image update) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 seconds or more, or 1/30 seconds or less. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

  By the determination processing of the frame switching timing, the subsequent processing (Steps D26 to D30 and the subsequent Steps D18 to D24) is executed at the frame switching timing in each of the processing cycles. It should be noted that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed on a frame basis (ie, on the processing cycle basis). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, for example, it becomes 100 ms in three frames. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt cycle.

  [Step D26] The control unit instructs the VDP 312 to draw a screen according to the command set in step D23. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table form and instructs VDP 312 to draw a screen.

  [Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sound from speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body including various motors and SOL (solenoid) (for example, the board effect device 44).

  [Step D30] The control unit executes a launch information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and according to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, for a predetermined number of balls to be lent)). This is a process for correcting the mode of the effect.

  After executing Step D30, the control unit returns to Step D18, and thereafter repeats the processing of Step D18 to Step D30. That is, Steps D18 to D30 constitute a loop process (may be referred to as a main loop process) that is repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the activation of the effect control device 300.

  Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the effect of the screen, but the signals and data generated or set by these control processings (particularly, various LEDs and motors are controlled). The process of actually outputting the drive control signal to the port is performed in a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there may be a case where only a command is issued by serial communication or the like and a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, the received command check processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the received command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

  The reception command (production command) has a configuration including MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), and the production control device (main board) 100 transmits the production command to the production control device 300. Are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.

  The process of receiving a command from the main board is performed by a "command reception interrupt process" (not shown). That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission / reception is automatically performed in a hardware manner (by the function of the CPU itself), and when a command is completely received, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified. Although it is only necessary to take out the command from the buffer, in the "command reception interrupt processing", every time there is a command reception interrupt, a command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities, The data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by “1” by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term “store” simply means that the information is stored in a predetermined storage area in a readable manner so as to be used for the subsequent control process (the same applies hereinafter). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by, for example, a storage area in the RAM 311a (or the RAM 322) of the CPU 311. It is sufficient that the capacity of the command buffer is equal to or larger than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the processing cycle described above; for example, 1/30 second).

  [Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the number of received commands. The command reception counter is set in RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a). Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in step D43 in principle, the command reception counter stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (the time corresponding to one processing cycle described above).

  [Step D42] The control unit determines whether or not the number of command receptions is “0 (zero)”. If the number of command receptions is not “0”, the control unit proceeds to step D43. If there is, the received command check processing ends. In the present application, "loading" data in the control processing as in step D41 means extracting data from the RAM (the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 of the present example).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of received commands.
Assuming that A: the value of the command reception counter and B: the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after the execution of step D41. Then, immediately after the execution of step D43, “A = AB = 0” is a normal movement. However, in the embodiment of the present example, the effect control device 300 interrupts the command reception from the game control device (main board) 100. Is given the highest priority without interrupt prohibition, the value of A may increase between the processing in step D41 and the processing in step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the count of the command is shifted, so that the subtraction process of “AB” is performed in step D43. I am doing it. However, when serial communication is used to transmit and receive commands from the main board as in the present embodiment, interrupts are prohibited and the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to “A ← 0”.

  [Step D44] The control unit stores the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to a command area (sometimes called a command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO (first-in first-out) buffer.

  [Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by, for example, “1” in the range of “0” to “31”. Do it. Note that the range from “0” to “31” corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

  [Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not step D44 and step D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to Step D47 when copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to Step D44 when copying is not completed.

  [Step D47] The control unit loads (ie, reads) the contents of the command area (the data stored first, of the data that has not been read in the command area, that is, the data to be read next). I do.

  [Step D48] The control unit executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing data of a loaded command (hereinafter, this command). The received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the next data to be read).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 are repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to Step D47 when the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed, and ends the received command check processing when the analysis is completed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

  [Step D51] The control unit separates and stores the upper byte of MODE and the lower byte of ACT of the data of the current command loaded in step D47 of the received command check process. Note that, in the case of a command of a variation system instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, upper byte data stored as MODE instructs a first half variation pattern, and lower byte data stored as ACT instructs a second half variation pattern. Things.

  [Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the MODE separated in step D51 is within a normal range. The control section proceeds to Step D53 when the value of MODE is within the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value of MODE is not within the normal range. Note that some MODE values are not defined and are not used, and if such values are not used, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not within the normal range.

  [Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within a normal range. The control unit proceeds to Step D54 when the value of ACT is in the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value of ACT is not in the normal range.

  The determination in step D53 as to whether the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of the ACT are defined in a predetermined ACTION check table (not shown), and are separated into the upper and lower limits in step D53. It is checked whether the value of the obtained ACT is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that the value is within the normal range (at this point, the missing tooth check described later has not been performed).

  [Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the separated ACT with respect to the value of the separated MODE is a correct combination. The control section proceeds to Step D55 when the value of ACT is a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis processing when the value is not a correct combination. The determination as to whether or not the ACT value is a correct combination can be made using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the MODE value are registered in order from the start address, and are provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in the match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, the combination is correct. It can be determined that they are not a combination.

  The determination as to whether or not the value of ACT is a correct combination is executed including a missing check of whether or not the combination of ACT is normal with respect to MODE. For one MODE, there are a plurality of valid ACTs, but their values are not always continuous (that is, some values do not exist discontinuously and some values are missing). Is checked to see if it is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is checked one by one whether they match.

  [Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. The control unit executes the variable command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

  Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). Further, a variation command (also referred to as a variation command or a variation pattern command) is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure, and a range in which data of the variation command can be taken is a variation command range.

  [Step D57] The control unit determines whether the MODE data is within the jackpot-related command range. When the MODE data is within the big hit command range, the control unit executes the big hit command processing (details omitted) (step D58). When the MODE data is not within the big hit command range, the control unit proceeds to step D59. . The jackpot-related command is a command for instructing an operation (such as display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to the effect during the jackpot, and the range of data of the jackpot-related command is the jackpot-related command range.

  [Step D59] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the symbol-related command range. The control unit executes the symbol command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the symbol command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol command range. . A symbol-type command (also referred to as a symbol command or a decorative special command) is a command for instructing information on a symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to stop the special symbol). Is a symbol command range.

  [Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the one-shot command range. The controller executes the one-shot command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the one-shot command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the one-shot command range. . Note that, unlike a command that has a meaning by a combination such as a symbol command and a variable command, a command that is established independently is called a single-shot command. The single command (sometimes called a single command) includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, and the like. The range that the data of this single command can take is a single command range.

  [Step D63] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the look-ahead symbol command range. When the MODE data is within the pre-reading symbol command range, the control unit executes the pre-reading symbol command processing (details omitted) (step D64). When the MODE data is not within the pre-reading symbol command range, the control unit performs step S64. Proceed to D65.

  [Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range. The control unit executes the prefetch variable command processing (details omitted) if the MODE data is within the prefetch variable command range (step D66), and executes the step if the MODE data is not within the prefetch variable command range. Proceed to D67. Note that the pre-reading design-related command and the pre-reading variation command are commands for a pre-reading effect.

  [Step D67] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the error command range. The control unit executes error command processing (details omitted) if the MODE data is within the error command range (step D68), and receives the command analysis processing if the MODE data is not within the error command range. To end. The error-related command is a command for notifying an error start and an error end.

  Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a variable display game corresponding to a start winning prize memory in which the variable display game of a special figure has not been executed (holding the start prize memory or simply holding). In order to notify the player in advance of whether or not a big hit will occur (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will occur) when the game is subsequently executed with a predetermined degree of reliability, a display of suspension of the start winning prize memory or the like is performed in a manner different from the usual manner. And so on. The pre-reading commands (pre-reading fluctuation-related commands and pre-reading design-related commands) are commands for informing in advance of a fluctuation pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to suspension of a start winning prize memory to be subjected to a pre-reading effect. It is transmitted from control device 100 to effect control device 300. It should be noted that ordinary variable commands and symbol commands that are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

(Decoration control processing)
Next, the decoration control processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the decoration control process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration control process is a process executed by the control unit in step D28 of the main process.

  [Step D71] The control unit executes a test mode decoration process. The test mode decoration process is a process of setting a decoration pattern for checking whether a decoration device such as an LED provided in the gaming machine 10 normally lights with a predetermined decoration pattern. The control unit executes the test mode decoration processing when the gaming machine 10 is activated in the test mode, and does not execute the test mode decoration processing when the gaming machine 10 is activated in the normal mode.

  [Step D72] The control unit executes an error decoration process. The control unit executes the decoration process at the time of error when the effect control device 300 receives the command related to the error from the game control device 100, and does not execute the decoration process at the time of error when the command related to the error is not received. The decoration process at the time of error is a process of setting a decoration pattern for notifying a player or an employee of a game hall that an error has occurred.

  [Step D73] The control unit executes a decoration setting process. The decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to a game state. The decoration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  [Step D74] The control unit executes an event decoration setting process. The event decoration setting process is a process of setting a decoration pattern according to a predetermined event when the event occurs. The predetermined event is, for example, when the push button 25 is operated.

  [Step D75] The control unit executes a decoration pattern control data setting process. The decoration pattern control data setting process is a process of setting control data to be transmitted to each of the effect devices (the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18), and sets control data according to the decoration pattern set in steps D71 to D74. I do. After executing the decoration pattern control data setting processing, the control unit ends the decoration control processing.

[Decoration setting processing]
Next, the decoration setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a view illustrating a flowchart of the decoration setting process in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The decoration setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D73 of the decoration control process.

  [Step D81] The control unit branches the process according to the gaming state. The control unit proceeds to Step D82 when the gaming state is “power-on”, proceeds to Step D84 when the gaming state is “power recovery”, and proceeds to Step D86 when the gaming state is “waiting for customer”, When the gaming state is “changing”, the process proceeds to step D88. When the gaming state is “symbol stopped”, the process proceeds to step D89. When the gaming state is “fanfare”, the process proceeds to step D90. When the game state is “rounding”, the process proceeds to step D91, and when the gaming state is “ending”, the process proceeds to step D92.

[Step D82] The control unit sets the decorative pattern in a loop setting. Note that the loop setting is to repeat a predetermined decorative pattern.
[Step D83] The control unit sets a power-on decoration pattern from power-on to a state in which a game can be played (waiting for a customer (state)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display corresponding to the power-on until the gaming machine 10 is in a playable state. After setting the power-on decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D84] The control unit sets the decorative pattern in a loop setting.
[Step D85] The control unit sets a power failure restoration decoration pattern until the game can be played (waiting for a customer (state)) after the power failure is restored. As a result, the gaming machine 10 repeatedly performs the decoration display corresponding to the restoration from the power failure until the gaming machine 10 is in a playable state. After setting the power failure restoration decoration pattern, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Step D86] The control unit sets the decorative pattern to a loop setting.
[Step D87] The controller executes a customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process while waiting for the customer (state). The control unit sets a decoration pattern corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration in the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 performs a decoration display corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration while waiting for the customer. After performing the customer waiting demonstration decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D88] The control unit executes the changing decoration setting process when the gaming state is “changing”, that is, while the changing display game is running. In the changing decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display in the case of including a jackpot notice) corresponding to an effect mode of the running variable display game. Color display). Thus, while the variable display game is being executed, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display corresponding to the effect mode of the variable display game being executed. After executing the changing decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D89] The control unit executes the symbol stop decoration setting process when the gaming state is “symbol stopped”, that is, when the identification symbol in the variable display game is stopped. The control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the identification symbol is being stopped in the decoration stopped decoration setting process. Thus, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the identification symbol is stopped while the identification symbol is stopped. The control unit ends the decoration setting process after executing the symbol-stopped decoration setting process.

  [Step D90] The control unit executes the fanfare decoration setting process when the gaming state is “fanfare”, that is, when the result of the variable display game is a big hit. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow display including a clockwise rainbow display and a counterclockwise rainbow display) indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit in the fanfare decoration setting processing. . As a result, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the result of the variable display game has been a big hit during the fanfare. After executing the decoration setting process during fanfare, the control unit ends the decoration setting process. The gaming machine 10 performs the decoration display with the decoration pattern set in the fanfare decoration setting process until the big hit state is started.

  [Step D91] The control unit executes a round decoration setting process when the game state is “round”, that is, when each round in the big hit state is being executed. The control unit sets a decoration pattern (for example, a rainbow color display including a clockwise rainbow color display and a counterclockwise rainbow color display) indicating that a round is being performed in the round decoration setting process. Thereby, during the round, the gaming machine 10 performs a decorative display indicating that the round is being performed. After executing the decoration setting process during the round, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

  [Step D92] The control unit executes the ending decoration setting process when the gaming state is “ending”, that is, when the ending process indicating that the big hit state has ended is being executed. In the ending decoration setting process, the control unit sets a decoration pattern indicating that the ending is being performed (for example, a rainbow display including a clockwise rainbow display and a counterclockwise rainbow display). As a result, during the ending, the gaming machine 10 performs a decoration display indicating that the ending is being performed. After executing the ending decoration setting process, the control unit ends the decoration setting process.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. First, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the second embodiment. In the following, a description will be given focusing on differences from the game board 30 of the first embodiment.

  On the right side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 of the gaming board 3000 of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, there is provided a general-purpose starting gate 34 for giving conditions for starting a general-purpose variable display game. The game ball that has won the general-purpose starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 109). Two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is provided on the lower right of the special variable winning device 38 arranged on the lower right of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The gaming balls that have won the general winning opening 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 109).

  Below the center case 40, a start winning prize port 36 serving as a first start winning prize port and a second special figure variability display game (special figure varieties display game) which provide a start condition for the first special figure variability display game (special figure 1 variance display game) A winning device 90 having a second starting winning opening 97 for giving a start condition of the two-variation display game) is provided. The winning device 90 includes a distributing member 92 for alternately distributing gaming balls flowing into the upper inflow port 91 to the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97 therein. The distribution member 92 is rotatable about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction. The tilting direction changes depending on the weight of the flowing game balls, and the left start winning port 36 on the left and the second start win on the right. Game balls are alternately distributed to the mouth 97. The game ball that has won the start winning port 36 is detected by the start port 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 109), and the game ball that has won the second start port 97 is detected by the start port 2 switch 97a (see FIG. 109). Is done. Further, below the prize device 90, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize port or the like is provided.

  On the right side of the center case 40, there is provided a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure variable display game. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction of falling rightward and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is always The closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) is maintained, which is almost vertical and in which the game ball cannot flow. When the result of the normal-floating display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 109) as a driving device rotates so that the upper end side is tilted to the right, and the normal fluctuation display game is performed. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for a player) in which a game ball easily flows into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 109). It should be noted that it is also possible to make it possible to win even when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, and to make it harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

  On the right side of the normal fluctuation prize device 37, there is formed a downflow path 615 that is covered with a transparent cover on the front side and communicates up and down, and game balls that have not won the normal fluctuation prize apparatus 37 pass through the downflow path 615. Flow down to A guide 616 is provided below the downflow path 615. The guiding portion 616 has an upper surface 617 formed as an inclined surface that is lowered to the left. The guiding ball 616 receives a downwardly flowing game ball with the upper surface 617 and guides the game ball to the left where the special fluctuation winning device 38 exists.

In addition, the guidance unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information about the special figure change display game.
The information display device 630 includes a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories that are the right to execute the first special figure variable display game, and a second start memory that is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game. And a second information display unit for displaying the number of. In addition, the special special figure variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the first to third symbols on the display device 41. The third special information display unit and the decoration special figure 2 change corresponding to the second special figure change display game by the fourth design separately from the decoration special figure change display game displayed by the first to third designs on the display device 41. A fourth information display unit for displaying a display game is provided.

  The first information display unit and the second information display unit each include two light emitting members, and the third information display unit and the fourth information display unit each include one light emitting member. In the second display device, these six light emitting members are arranged in two rows on the left and right in three by three. The upper two light emitting members in the right column constitute a first information display unit, and the upper two light emitting members in the left column constitute a second information display unit. The lower one light emitting member in the right column constitutes a third information display unit, and the lower one light emitting member in the left column constitutes a fourth information display unit.

  The first information display section and the second information display section are each composed of two light-emitting members, and a design is provided around each information display section so that the two light-emitting members are related. At a glance, it can be seen that one information display section is constituted by two light emitting members. Further, the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each constituted by one light emitting member, but the designs around these information display sections are designed to be understood to be independent. Thus, it can be seen at a glance that the information display section is constituted by one light emitting member. It should be noted that the design around the light emitting member has a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine, so as not to impair the aesthetic appearance. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not formed by attaching a seal or the like, but is formed into a member constituting the guiding portion 616, so that labor and cost during manufacturing can be reduced.

  Further, on the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable prize winning device (large winning prize port) 38 which can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game is arranged. Has been established. Although the details of the configuration of the special fluctuation winning device 38 will be described later, depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening / closing member 990 changes from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous to the player) with the large winning opening closed. The opening / closing member 990 retreats and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous for the player) that can be received. That is, the special fluctuation winning device 38 has a special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member 990 driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 109) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state (first special gaming state). During the small win game state (the second special game state), the large winning opening is changed from a closed state to an open state, thereby facilitating the flow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is provided with a predetermined winning state. A game value (prize ball) is provided. In addition, inside the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 109) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the special winning opening. .

  In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, of the gaming area 32 in which the gaming balls flow, the left area of the center case 40 is defined as a left gaming area, and the right area of the center case 40 is defined as a right gaming area. It has been. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and fires the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), thereby winning the start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90. By firing a game ball to the right game area (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize at the general-purpose starting gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. ing.

  Outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right portion of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which constitute the special figure variable display game, and the prize to the general figure start gate 34 are displayed. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a game-changing display game as a trigger and displaying various information.

Next, the special fluctuation winning device 38 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the special fluctuation winning device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front side.
The special fluctuation winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950, a rear wall member 960, a main body 970, and a cover member 979.

  The front wall member 950 includes a plate-shaped front portion 951. The front surface of the front portion 951 is arranged close to the rear surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game balls do not flow down in front of the front surface. The front surface of the front portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by a player, and is a lens that is decorated and partially transmits light. On the back surface of the front wall member 950, an LED (not shown) is provided as a decoration means, and it is possible to decorate the special fluctuation winning device 38 with light. The color of the light for decorating the special fluctuation winning device 38 is different from the light emission color of the collective display device 50, thereby preventing the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from becoming difficult to understand. Further, the upper part of the plate-shaped front part 951 is a flow path front wall 952 that forms a front side wall of the downflow path.

  The rear wall member 960 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961. A front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961, and a portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. The upper part of the rear surface part 961 is a flow path rear wall 962 that forms the rear side wall of the downflow path. An opening / closing member insertion portion 963 that penetrates back and forth for inserting the opening / closing member 990 from the back surface side of the rear wall member 960 is formed at a position that is a lower end of the flow path rear wall 962.

  In addition, a plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 that protrude forward are provided on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962. The rear wall protruding portion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped protruding portion having left and right side surfaces inclined, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of concave portions provided on the opening / closing member 990. The rear wall projecting portion 964 and the concave portion have a function of guiding game balls flowing to the left to the front in order to meander the game balls flowing down the downflow path. That is, it forms a contact portion with which a game ball flowing down the downflow path can contact. Since the rear wall protrusion 964 is provided adjacent to the concave portion, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right portion of the downflow path in a portion where the concave portion is not provided, and to make the game ball meander reliably. Becomes possible.

  A guiding channel 955 penetrates back and forth so as to communicate with the rear surface of the rear surface 961 at a central portion of the rear surface 961 and at a portion of the front wall member 950 facing the portion where the guiding channel 955 is formed. A through portion 968 is formed. Above the guide channel 955, a switch mounting portion 965 that penetrates back and forth so as to accommodate the rear portion of the special winning opening switch 38a is formed. Further, the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 and a portion of the front wall member 950 opposite to the portion where the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game ball winning the general winning opening 35 is transferred to the back side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a penetrating back and forth is formed so as to communicate the general winning opening channel 966 to be guided to the back surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

  The main body 970 includes a rear wall portion 972 that forms a rear wall of the guide flow path 955. In the rear wall portion 972, a game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetration portion 968 is provided to the guide channel 955 at a position facing the through portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960. There is formed a rib 973 that guides right along. Further, at a position facing the downstream end of the guiding flow path 955 formed in the rear wall member 960 in the rear wall portion 972, a penetration portion 974 penetrating back and forth is formed. The game ball flowing down the guide channel 955 passes through the penetrating portion 974, is guided to the back side of the main body 970, and flows into a discharge channel for discharging the game ball to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In addition, a portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed on the rear wall member 960 has a through hole for guiding a game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 to the back side of the main body portion 970. A part 975 is formed. The game ball flowing down the general winning opening flow path 966 is guided to the back side of the main body 970 through the penetrating portion 975, detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 109), and then out of the gaming machine. Into the discharge flow path for discharging air.

  An opening / closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports an opening / closing member 990 that operates in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening / closing member insertion portion 963 formed on the rear wall member 960. The opening / closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion that penetrates through the main body 970 and can contact the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces of the opening / closing member 990 to guide and support the opening / closing member 990. A guide wall 977 is provided so as to extend in the front-rear direction.

  An opening / closing member unit 980 including an opening / closing member 990 and an operation mechanism for operating the opening / closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body 970. The opening / closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member for mounting various members, an opening / closing member 990 that can slide in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 109) for operating the opening / closing member 990. .

  One end of the special winning opening solenoid 38b is connected to the drive arm 983. The drive arm 983 is provided with a rotating shaft 983b extending in the up-down direction, and is rotatable around the rotating shaft 983b. When the special fluctuation winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft of the special winning opening solenoid 38b is extended, and the drive arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range. When the special fluctuation winning device 38 is opened from this state, the drive shaft of the special winning opening solenoid 38b is retracted, so that the drive arm 983 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 983b as viewed from the back side. To retract the opening / closing member 990 backward. As a result, the special fluctuation winning device 38 is brought into an open state. When closing the special fluctuation winning device 38, the operation reverse to the above-described operation is performed.

  In the main body 970, a V-door 520 is provided at a position where an induction flow path 955 constituted by the main body 970 and the rear wall member 960 becomes an inflow portion of a V-flow path 955a formed by branching. . The V-door 520 is slid in the front-rear direction by the specific area solenoid 520a (see FIG. 109) to prevent the inflow to the V-channel 955a, and retracts rearward to allow the inflow to the V-channel 955a. To be allowed.

Further, the main body 970 is provided with a specific area switch 460 for detecting a game ball flowing into the V flow path 955a.
Note that the game ball flowing into the V flow path 955a is detected by the specific area switch 460 that detects the game ball flowing into the V flow path 955a, passes through the through portion 974, and is guided to the back side of the main body 970. It is designed to flow into a discharge channel for discharging game balls to the outside of the gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the probability state after the end of the special game state is not determined by the big hit symbol, but the game ball flows into the V flow path 955a in the special game state and the specific area switch 460 is set. Is set to a high probability state based on the detection at

  In addition, the main body part 970 places the game sphere of the main body part 970 at a position where the guiding flow path 955 constituted by the main body part 970 and the rear wall member 960 becomes an inflow part of the discharge ball flow path 955b formed by branching. A through-hole 462 for guiding to the back side and a remaining ball discharge switch 461 for detecting a game ball flowing down the discharge ball flow path 955b are provided.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 includes a CPU unit 110 having a game microcomputer 111, an input unit 120 having an input port, and an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver. The data bus 140 connects the CPU 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10, a starting port 1 switch 36 a in the winning device 90, a starting port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variable winning device 37, The gate switch 34a in the general figure starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the starting opening 2 switch 97a in the winning device 90, the specific area switch in the special variable winning device 38. An interface chip (proximity I / F) which is connected to a switch 460 and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11 V and a low level of 7 V supplied from these switches and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0 V to 5 V. 121 are provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor and the proximity switch are short-circuited incorrectly, the sensor and the switch are disconnected from the connector, and the lead wire is cut off and floated. It is configured to detect an abnormal state as described above and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switches 37a and 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the special winning port switch 38a, the specific area switch 460, the sensor, An abnormality detection signal 1 output when an abnormality of the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of a fraudulent detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a game sensor may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start-up opening 1 switch 36a and the start-up opening 2 switches 37a, 97a are configured to be input not only to the second input port 123 but also to the gaming microcomputer 111. I have.

  In the second embodiment, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the special variable winning device 38, a specific area solenoid 520a for opening the V-door 520 of the special variable winning device 38, Further, a second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data of a general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b, the specific area solenoid 520a, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. (Drive circuit) 138a, second driver 138b that outputs on / off drive signal of segment line on current supply side of collective display device 50 output from third output port 135, and batch output from fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c for outputting an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the display device 50, and an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

Next, the configuration of a screen on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment.
The screen 700 is the display content of the display device 41. The screen 700 includes a large symbol group 701, a small symbol group 702, a special figure 1 reserved number display 703, a special figure 2 reserved number display 704, a reserved display 705, and a reserved digest display 706.

  The large symbol group 701 is in charge of a game effect for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the large symbol group 701 in a substantially central portion of the screen 700 in a large size. The large symbol group 701 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the large symbol group 701 on the screen 700 each indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

  The small symbol group 702 is in charge of the notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the display device 41 displays the small symbol group 702 in a small size on the periphery so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 701. The small symbol group 702 independently secures the visibility of the symbol. The small symbol group 702 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 702 on the screen 700 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

  In general, the large symbol group 701 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 702, has a higher degree of freedom in the display position, and its display mode can be largely changed. Conversely, the small symbol group 702 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 701, and has a lower degree of freedom in display position (for example, fixed position).

  The special figure 1 reservation number display 703 displays the reservation storage number (starting storage number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 704 displays the reserved number of special figure 2 games. The hold display 705 can indicate the number of storages of the special figure change display game by the display mode, and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each storage storage. The number of held storages displayed by the hold display 705 corresponds to the sum of the number of held storages displayed by the special figure 1 held number display 703 and the number of held storages displayed by the special figure 2 held number display 704. The reserved digest display 706 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

  Note that the small symbol group 702, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 704 are located at positions where the player does not enter the blind spot of the player even by the operation of the board effect device 44 or a game ball rolling on the front side. At any time, and always shows the variable display state and the number of stored memories to the player.

  In the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702 are each configured by a three-digit symbol, but may be any number as long as it includes one or more symbols. In the gaming machine 10, the number of digits of the symbols is aligned in the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702, but the number of symbols in the symbol is different between the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702. Is also good.

  Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, changes the transparency from 0% to 50%), With respect to the small symbol group 702, the transparency of the symbol can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can easily grasp the gaming state of the player with the small symbol group 702 while securing the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 701.

  Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the hue of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 (for example, change from red to blue) during the variable display and during the stop display, or during the variable display, and For 702, the hue of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to red). Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the saturation of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change the saturation from 100% to 0%). Also, it is possible to fix the saturation of the symbol for the small symbol group 702 (for example, to fix the saturation to 100%). Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the brightness of the symbol for the large symbol group 701 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, changes the brightness from 100% to 10%), The lightness of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%) for the small symbol group 702. Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the size of the symbols in the large symbol group 701 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change the size from the standard size to the enlarged (reduced) size). Even if there is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 702. Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the display position of the symbols in the large symbol group 701 during the variable display and during the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, from the center of the screen to the upper right of the screen), With respect to the small symbol group 702, the display position of the symbol can be fixed. The gaming machine 10 can change the design of the large symbol group 701 (for example, from a rectangle to a circle, or from a number to a character) during the variable display, during the stop display, or during the variable display. Even if there is, the design of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number) for the small symbol group 702. Further, even when the gaming machine 10 may change the symbol variation display mode for the large symbol group 701 during the variable display (for example, change from vertical scroll to horizontal scroll), the symbol variation display mode for the small symbol group 702 may be changed. Can be fixed (for example, fixed to shaft rotation fluctuation).

These also allow the gaming machine 10 to easily grasp the gaming state of the player with the small symbol group 702 while securing the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 701.
Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the variation mode during the variable display for the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702. For example, when the vertical scroll is performed on the large symbol group 701, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the large symbol group 701 from the small symbol group 702. Further, even when the large symbol group 701 and the small symbol group 702 update the symbols asynchronously, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

  Next, a description will be given of a jackpot display effect of the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of an effect flow of the second embodiment. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of the effect flow of the second embodiment. FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 117 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 6) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment.

  [Production Flow F11] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation stop state (stop display state) before the fluctuation starts in the fluctuation display game. A screen example of the stop display state is shown in a screen 710 in FIG. 113 (F11).

  The screen 710 shows a screen during symbol stop (stop display). On the screen 710, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are stopped, indicating that the special figure variable display game is being stopped and displayed. On the screen 710, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group are stopped, indicating that the special figure variation display game is being stopped.

  Further, on the screen 710, the reserved digest display 706 indicates by blank display that the special figure variable display game is not in the variable display state. On the screen 710, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703 indicates that the reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game is “4”, and the special figure 2 reserved number display 704 indicates that the reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game is “4”. 0, and the hold display 705 indicates that the total number of reserved storages for the special figure 1 game and the special figure 2 game is “4”.

When the gaming machine 10 starts changing symbols, the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F12.
[Production Flow F12] The gaming machine 10 starts variable display. An example of the screen after the start of the variable display is shown in a screen 711 in FIG.

  The screen 711 is a screen after the screen 710 and is a screen after the start of the variable display. On the screen 711, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the large symbol group 701 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuating display game is fluctuating. On the screen 711, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuating display game is fluctuating.

  At this time, the gaming machine 10 makes the large symbol group 701 translucent on the screen 711, so that the visibility of the background display is higher than the visibility of the large symbol group 701. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 secures visibility in priority to the background display by not setting the small symbol group 702 on the screen 711 in a semi-transparent state.

  On the screen 711, the special figure 1 reserved number display 703 displays a value (“3”) obtained by subtracting one from the reserved storage number of the special figure 1 game from “4”, and the reserved display 705 indicates the special figure change. A value (“3”) obtained by subtracting one from the “4” stored memory count of the display game is displayed. The hold digest display 706 displays a hold storage display during digestion, and indicates that the special figure change display game is in the change display state.

The game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F13 when deriving the loss, and proceeds to the effect flow F14 when deriving the big hit (special game state).
[Production Flow F13] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation display result (outlier). An example of a screen displaying the fluctuation display result (outlier) is shown in a screen 712 in FIG. 113 (F13).

The screen 712 is a screen subsequent to the screen 711, and shows a state in which the variable display result has been lost.
On the screen 712, the large symbol group 701 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, and indicates that the variable display result is a loss. Also, on the screen 712, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, and indicates that the fluctuation display result is a loss.

[Production Flow F14] The gaming machine 10 displays the result of the fluctuation display (big hit). An example of a screen displaying the fluctuation display result (big hit) is shown on a screen 713 in FIG. 113 (F14).
The screen 713 is a screen subsequent to the screen 711, and shows a state in which the variable display result is a big hit.

  On the screen 713, the large symbol group 701 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a big hit, and indicates that the variable display result is a big hit. On the screen 713, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a big hit, and indicates that the variable display result is a big hit.

After guiding the occurrence of the big hit, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F15.
[Production Flow F15] The gaming machine 10 starts a big hit production. A screen example at the start of the big hit effect is shown on a screen 714 in FIG. 114 (F15).

  The screen 714 is a screen after the screen 713, and is a screen at the start of the big hit effect. The screen 714 includes an effect display 715, a round display 716, and a cumulative display 717 in the display content.

  The effect display 715 is responsible for displaying effects such as images. On the screen 714, the effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to the big hit. In the gaming machine 10, the effect display 715 is provided only on a part (center part) of the screen 714, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may provide the effect display 715 on the entire screen, and arrange other display elements (cumulative display 717 and round display 716) on the front side of the effect display 715.

  The round display 716 displays the number of rounds of the big hit (the number of times of opening the special winning opening) and the progress of the round (progress) according to the display mode. Specifically, the round display 716 displays the number of rounds according to the number of heart symbols to be displayed, and displays the progress (progress) of the round according to the lighting state of the heart symbols. On the screen 714, the round display 716 displays six heart symbols in a lighting state to indicate that the number of rounds is “6” and that one round has not yet started.

  For example, the number of rounds per jackpot is three patterns of “6”, “9”, and “12” (six jackpots, nine round jackpots, and 12 round jackpots). , The number of heart symbols equal to or less than the number of rounds of a jackpot (for example, the number of heart symbols of nine or less when the generated jackpot is a nine round jackpot) is displayed.

  The cumulative display 717 displays the cumulative state of the rounds (cumulative rounds) within a predetermined period (within the cumulative period). The accumulation display 717 displays the accumulation status of the rounds with a value obtained by converting a predetermined number of rounds into one unit (one unit). On the screen 714, the cumulative display 717 displays "1", indicating that the first unit (set) is being executed.

  For example, the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 is used when determining a notification mode in a big hit such as a video or BGM. That is, the gaming machine 10 notifies the image or the BGM according to the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 during the big hit. The predetermined period (cumulative period) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the correspondence (conversion rule) between the round and “Kyun” as a unit of cumulative display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the correspondence between units of cumulative display and rounds according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 118, in the gaming machine 10, the cumulative rounds “1 to 3” correspond to one kun, the cumulative rounds “4 to 6” correspond to two kuns,. "3n-2 to 3n" correspond to the n key. In other words, Kyun is a value obtained by unit conversion with three rounds as one unit. According to this, when the cumulative round is “1 to 3”, the gaming machine 10 displays “1” on the cumulative display 717, and when the cumulative round is “4 to 6,” the cumulative display is performed. If the cumulative round is “3n−2 to 3n”, n is displayed in the cumulative display 717. The above is the correspondence between the rounds and the units of the cumulative display.

After displaying the start of the big hit effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F16.
[Effect Flow F16] The gaming machine 10 performs a normal round progress effect (a round progress effect without additional round effect (promotion effect)). Screen examples in the normal round progression rendering are shown in FIG. 114 (F16a1) screen 718, FIG. 114 (F16a2) screen 719, FIG. 114 (F16b1) screen 720, FIG. 115 (F16b2) screen 721, and FIG. 115 (F16b3). This is shown on screen 723.

  The screen 718 is a screen after the screen 714 and shows a screen during one round (during opening of the first special winning opening). On the screen 718, the round display 716 displays the first heart symbol in a blinking state to indicate that the first round is being performed (the first big winning opening is being opened).

  The screen 719 is a screen after the screen 718 and shows a screen after one round is completed and before two rounds are started (during an interval between the first round and the two rounds). On the screen 719, the round display 716 displays the first heart symbol in an extinguished state, and displays the second to sixth heart symbols in an illuminated state, so that after the first round and before the start of the second round ( (During the interval between round 1 and round 2).

  The screen 720 is a screen after the screen 719, and is a screen during three rounds (during opening of the third special winning opening). On the screen 720, the round display 716 indicates that the third round is being performed by displaying the third heart symbol in a blinking state.

  The screen 721 is a screen subsequent to the screen 720, and is a screen in a case where the value of the cumulative display 717 is added (counted up) at the end of the round (the round is completed). The screen 721 includes a count-up display 722 in the display content. The count-up display 722 clearly indicates that the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 is counted up (added). On the screen 721, the count-up display 722 clearly indicates that the value displayed by the cumulative display 717 is to be counted up by displaying “Kyun” which is a unit of the cumulative display 717.

  The screen 723 is a screen after the screen 721 and after the end of the third round and before the start of the fourth round (during the interval between the third round and the fourth round). On the screen 723, the round display 716 displays the first to third heart symbols in an extinguished state, and displays the fourth to sixth heart symbols in an illuminated state. Indicates before the start of the round (during the interval between rounds 3 and 4). On the screen 723, the cumulative display 717 displays the value (“2 kyun”) after counting up from “1 kyun” on the screen 720, and the second unit (set) is being executed. Indicates that there is.

  As described above, in the normal round progression effect, the gaming machine 10 performs the round by notifying the progress status of the round by the round display 716 and notifying the image corresponding to the big hit by the effect display 715.

When the number of lit heart symbols becomes zero as a result of the progress of the round as a result of the round, that is, when the number of remaining rounds becomes zero, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F23.
As a result of the progress of the round, the gaming machine 10 determines that the round addition determination timing has come (the number of remaining rounds has reached a specified value (for example, 2) and the number of heart symbols has reached the display upper limit (for example, 12) If it does not reach and there is room to add a round), the process proceeds to the effect flow F17, where a special round progress effect (round progress effect with additional round effect) is performed.

In other cases, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F16, and continues the normal round progress effect.
[Production Flow F17] The gaming machine 10 starts a round additional production. A screen example at the start of the additional round effect is shown on a screen 724 in FIG. 115 (F17).

  The screen 724 is a screen after the screen 723, and is a screen at the start of the additional round effect. The screen 724 includes an effect display 715, a round display 716, a cumulative display 717, and an effect success / failure display 725 in the display content.

  The production success / failure display 725 is responsible for displaying the success / failure of the production. On the screen 724, the effect success / failure display 725 displays the success / failure of the additional round effect using a heart-shaped symbol. In addition, on the screen 724, the effect success / failure display 725 is displayed on the front side of the effect display 715. As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays the effect display 725 on the front side of the effect display 715 rather than the effect display 715, thereby ensuring visibility that is higher than the effect display 715. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect (attention, visibility) of the effect display 725, and can prevent the player from overlooking the additional round effect. On the screen 724, the round display 716 displays the fifth heart symbol in a blinking state to indicate that the fifth round is being performed (the fifth winning opening is being opened).

After the start of the additional round effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F18.
[Effect Flow F18] The gaming machine 10 performs a success / failure effect to determine whether the additional round effect is successful. A screen example at the time of the success / failure effect is shown on a screen 726 in FIG. 115 (F17).

  The screen 726 is a screen subsequent to the screen 724, and shows a screen of a success / failure effect execution state that stimulates success / failure of the round additional effect. On the screen 726, an effect success / failure display 725 displays an effect (successful success effect) in which the symbol of the shape of the heart is stopped with the character of “development” displayed on the surface and the success of the effect is achieved. .

  When the effect ends successfully (when a round is added), the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F19, and when the effect ends in failure (when the round is not added), the game machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F21.

[Production Flow F19] The gaming machine 10 performs a success display. A screen example of the success display is shown in a screen 727 of FIG. 116 (F19).
The screen 727 is a screen after the screen 726, and is a screen displayed when the effect is successful. On the screen 727, the production success / failure display 725 stops and displays the symbol of the shape of the heart with the word "development" displayed on its surface, indicating that the production has been successful.

When the success display is performed, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F20.
[Production Flow F20] The gaming machine 10 adds a round. A screen example after adding the round is shown in a screen 728 in FIG. 116 (F20).

  The screen 728 is a screen after the screen 727 and shows a screen after the round is added. On the screen 728, in the round display 716, the number of heart symbols to be configured is added by three (one key) from the state of the screen 727 (six heart symbols), and nine heart symbols ( 9 rounds).

When the round is added, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F21.
[Production Flow F21] The gaming machine 10 performs a failure display. A screen example of the failure display is shown on a screen 729 in FIG. 116 (F21).

  The screen 729 is a screen after the screen 726, and is a screen displayed when the effect has failed. On the screen 729, the performance success / failure display 725 displays a broken heart-shaped symbol, indicating that the performance has failed.

When the failure display is performed, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F22.
[Production Flow F22] The gaming machine 10 displays round digestion. Screen examples after the round digestion are shown in a screen 730 in FIG. 117 (F22a) and a screen 731 in FIG. 117 (F22b).

  The screen 730 is a screen after the screen 728, and shows a state in which the round display 716 turns off the heart symbol of the fifth round and clearly indicates that the fifth round is completed.

  The screen 731 is a screen after the screen 729, and shows a state in which the round display 716 turns off the heart symbol of the fifth round and clearly indicates that the fifth round is completed.

The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F16, and starts the normal round progress effect again.
[Effect Flow F23] The gaming machine 10 ends the big hit effect and stops fluctuating.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 performs a round additional effect (a promotion effect for improving the value of the big hit (also referred to as a rank-up effect or a value-enhancing effect)) using the effect success / failure display 725 during the big hit effect. As a result, the gaming machine 10 gives the player an expectation that the jackpot will change (promote) from a low value jackpot (for example, 6 rounds jackpot) to a high value jackpot (for example, 12 rounds jackpot). You can improve your interest.

  Next, the timing of performing the special round progress effect will be described more specifically with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating the execution timing of the special round progress rendering effect of the second embodiment.

  The timing T11 indicates a timing at which the gaming machine 10 ends the round and starts an interval, and the number of remaining rounds becomes 2 (specified value). The timing T12 indicates the timing at which the round is started after the end of the interval. Timing T13 indicates the timing at which the round has ended.

  The gaming machine 10 continues the normal round progress rendering until the number of remaining rounds becomes 2 (the specified value) and the round is started (until timing T12). When the round starts with the number of remaining rounds being 2 (the specified value), the gaming machine 10 switches the effect type, and executes a special round progress effect within the round (from timing T12 to timing T13).

  The above is the timing at which the gaming machine 10 executes the special round progress effect. Note that the timing at which the gaming machine 10 executes the special round progress effect is an example, and is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may execute a special round progression effect in an interval (between timing T11 and timing T12) in a state where the number of remaining rounds is 2 (specified value), or the number of remaining rounds is 2 specified value. A special round progression effect may be executed over the rounds from the interval in the state of ()).

Next, an accumulation period in which the value of the accumulation display is continuously accumulated will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of the process of clearing the cumulative round counter according to the second embodiment.
The cumulative round counter is a counter that counts the cumulative number of rounds. The cumulative round counter clear process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102).

  [Step D100] The control unit determines whether or not the value of the cumulative round counter is 0 (the cumulative round is 0). When the control unit determines that the value of the cumulative round counter is 0, the control unit ends the cumulative round counter clearing process. When the control unit determines that the value of the cumulative round counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step D101.

  [Step D101] The control unit determines whether the gaming state is a high probability state (probable change state) or a time saving state. If the control unit determines that the gaming state is the high probability state or the time saving state, the control unit ends the cumulative round counter clearing process. If the control unit determines that the gaming state is not the high probability state or the time saving state (the normal state), the process proceeds to step D102. Proceed to.

[Step D102] The control unit clears the value of the cumulative round counter (sets the value of the cumulative round counter to 0).
According to this, the gaming machine 10 keeps accumulating the value of the accumulation round counter when the game is in the high probability state or the time saving state, and clears the accumulation round counter when the game is not in the high probability state or the time reduction state. That is, the gaming machine 10 continues to accumulate the value of the accumulative round counter when a jackpot occurs while the game is supported by the jackpot that occurred before.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 continues to accumulate the value of the accumulation round counter when the previously generated big hit contributes to the generated big hit, thereby determining the relevance with the previous big hit. Can be recognized.

  Next, a display effect in a high probability state of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of an effect flow of the second embodiment. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 7) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment. FIG. 123 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second embodiment.

  [Effect Flow F31] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation stop state (stop display state) before the fluctuation starts in the fluctuation display game. A screen example in the fluctuation stop state is shown in a screen 732 in FIG. 122 (F31).

The screen 732 includes a small symbol group 702, a special figure 1 reserved number display 703, a special figure 2 reserved number display 704, an effect display 715, and a symbol display 733 in the display content.
The symbol display 733 is used in place of the large symbol group 701, and is in charge of notification of a variable display state. Specifically, the symbol display 733 notifies the variable display state by the display mode. The symbol display 733 displays a heart-shaped symbol, and when the heart-shaped symbol is displayed in a stopped state, indicates that the heart-shaped symbol is in a stopped state. ) Indicates that the variable display is being performed. Further, the symbol display 733 displays a small symbol (a symbol smaller than the large symbol group 701) on the periphery so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the effect display 715.

  On the screen 732, the symbol display 733 displays a heart-shaped symbol in a stopped state, indicating that the movement is being stopped. On the screen 732, the small symbol group 702 is in a stopped state, and indicates that the small symbol group 702 is in a variable stop state. On the screen 732, the effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to the high probability state. On the screen 732, the special figure 1 reservation number display 703 indicates that the number of reserved storages of the special figure 1 game is “2”, and the special figure 2 reservation number display 704 indicates that the reservation storage number of the special figure 1 game is “2”. 3 ".

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the variable display state while securing the visibility of the effect display 715 by using the symbol display 733 instead of the large symbol group 701.
The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F32 when the game does not reach the reach, and proceeds to the effect flow F33 when the game machine 10 reaches the reach.

  [Production Flow F32] The gaming machine 10 displays a fluctuation display result (outlier). An example of a screen during variable display when the image does not develop into a reach is shown on a screen 734 in FIG. 122 (F32a), and an example of a screen displaying the result of the variable display (out) is shown on a screen 735 in FIG. 122 (F32b).

  A screen 734 is a screen after the screen 732, and is a screen during variable display when the screen does not develop into reach. On the screen 734, the symbol display 733 indicates that the heart-shaped symbol is variably displayed by variably displaying the symbol. On the screen 734, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 702 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuating display game is fluctuating.

  Also, on the screen 734, the special figure 1 reservation number display 703 displays “2”, and the special figure 2 reservation number display 704 is a value obtained by subtracting the reservation storage number of the special figure 2 game by one from “3” ( "2") is displayed.

  The screen 735 is a screen after the screen 734, and displays a variable display result (outlier). On the screen 735, the symbol display 733 stops and displays the heart-shaped symbol in the same manner as before the start of the change, thereby ending the variable display performed on the screen 734 and indicating that the result of the variable display is incorrect. . Also, on the screen 735, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, and indicates that the fluctuation display result is a loss.

After displaying the fluctuation display result (out), the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F31.
[Effect Flow F33] The gaming machine 10 starts a reach effect (a derivation process effect for deriving a special game state). A screen example at the start of the reach effect is shown on a screen 736 in FIG.

The screen 736 is a screen after the screen 732, and is a screen at the start of the reach effect.
The screen 736 includes a small symbol group 702, a special figure 1 reserved number display 703, a special figure 2 reserved number display 704, a production display 715, and a production success / failure display 725.

  On the screen 736, the effect success / failure display 725 displays the success / failure of the reach effect by using a heart-shaped symbol, similarly to the round additional effect. On the screen 736, the effect display 725 is displayed on the front side of the effect display 715. As described above, the gaming machine 10 displays the effect display 725 on the front side of the effect display 715 rather than the effect display 715, thereby ensuring visibility that is higher than the effect display 715. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can enhance the effect (attention, visibility) of the effect display 725, and can prevent the player from overlooking the reach effect.

  On the screen 736, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol of the small symbol group 702 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuating display game is fluctuating. Also, on the screen 736, the special figure 1 reservation number display 703 displays “2”, and the special figure 2 reservation number display 704 is a value obtained by subtracting the reservation storage number of the special figure 2 game by one from “3” ( "2") is displayed.

When starting the reach effect, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F34.
[Direction Flow F34] The gaming machine 10 performs a success / failure effect to determine whether the reach effect is successful. A screen example at the time of the success / failure effect is shown on a screen 737 in FIG. 123 (F34).

  The screen 737 is a screen after the screen 736, and shows a screen showing a success / failure effect execution state for stimulating the success / failure of the reach effect. On the screen 737, the production success / failure display 725 displays a heart-shaped symbol with the word “development” displayed on the surface, as in the case of the round addition production, and a success / failure that indicates whether or not the production is successful. Display the effect.

  The gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F36 when the effect ends successfully (when a big hit is derived), and proceeds to the effect flow F35 when the effect ends in failure (when a loss is derived).

[Production Flow F35] The gaming machine 10 displays a failure. A screen example of the failure display is shown on a screen 738 in FIG. 123 (F35).
The screen 738 is a screen after the screen 737, and is a screen displayed when the effect has failed. On the screen 738, the performance success / failure display 725 displays a broken heart-shaped symbol, indicating that the performance has failed. On the screen 738, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a loss, and indicates that the variable display result is a loss.

After displaying the failure display, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F31.
[Production Flow F36] The gaming machine 10 performs a success display. A screen example of the success display is shown in a screen 739 in FIG. 123 (F36).

  The screen 739 is a screen after the screen 737, which is displayed when the effect is successful. On the screen 739, the production success / failure display 725 stops and displays the heart-shaped symbol with the word "development" displayed on its surface, indicating that the production was successful. On the screen 739, the small symbol group 702 is stopped and displayed in a symbol combination mode corresponding to a big hit, and indicates that the variable display result is a big hit.

After displaying the success, the gaming machine 10 proceeds to the effect flow F37.
[Production Flow F37] The gaming machine 10 starts a big hit production. A screen example at the start of the big hit effect is shown on a screen 740 in FIG. 123 (F37).

  The screen 740 is a screen after the screen 739, and is a screen at the start of the big hit effect. On the screen 740, the effect display 715 displays an image or the like corresponding to a big hit. In the screen 740, the round display 716 displays six heart symbols in a lighting state to indicate that the number of rounds is "6" and that one round has not yet started. On the screen 740, the cumulative display 717 displays "11 Kyun", indicating that the eleventh unit (set) is being executed.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 performs the reach effect in the high-probability state using the effect display 725. That is, the gaming machine 10 executes the reach effect in the high probability state and the promotion effect during the big hit effect in the same effect mode.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the reach effect in the high probability state and the promotion effect during the big hit effect. For example, when the reach production in the high-probability state derives a big hit and a promotion effect is performed within the big hit, the gaming machine 10 can give a sense of unity to a series of productions by executing in a similar production mode. it can.

  Further, since the reach effect and the promotion effect in the high probability state are in the same effect mode, in the gaming machine 10, in the high probability state, the number of times the effect display 725 performs the success display increases. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can increase the number of occurrences of the big hits of the bodily sensation to the actual number of occurrences of the big hits (giving the player the feeling that the big hits are occurring more than actually occurs). it can).

  Further, in general, the opportunity for the player to come into contact with the promotion effect in the special game state (big hit) is limited, so that the contents of the effect of the promotion effect cannot be understood. There were times when I could not do that. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, since a part of the promotion effect and a part of the reach effect (the derivation process effect) in the high probability state are the same effect, the opportunity to deepen the understanding of the effect contents is expanded. It is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to the first modification of the second embodiment.

  Screen 741 is a modified example of screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). The screen 741 shows a state where a symbol display 733a displaying a star-shaped symbol is used instead of the symbol display 733 displaying a heart-shaped symbol.

  Screen 742 is a modification of screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). The screen 742 shows a state in which a symbol display 733b displaying a character-shaped symbol is used instead of the symbol display 733 displaying a heart-shaped symbol.

  Screen 743 is a modification of screen 732 shown in FIG. 122 (F31). The screen 743 shows a state in which a symbol display 733c that displays two character-shaped symbols (two symbols) is used instead of the symbol display 733 that displays a heart-shaped symbol.

  The above is the first modification of the second embodiment. As described above, the gaming machine 10 can use a symbol (a star-shaped) symbol other than a heart or a symbol display composed of a character symbol. The gaming machine 10 can also use a symbol display composed of two or more symbols.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described second embodiment (including the first modification) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 has an effect means (display device 41) capable of producing a variable display game, and a first game state (a big hit) capable of deriving a special gaming state (big hit) with a first probability in the variable display game. Control means (game control device 100, which can transition between a normal game state) and a second game state (high-probability state: probable state) in which a special game state can be derived with a second probability higher than the first probability. Effect control device 300). The control means presents at least a part of a special game state derivation process effect (reach effect) performed in the second game state and a first value (number of rounds) for the special game state, and then displays the first value. Production control is performed by the production means by sharing at least a part of the promotion production (round addition production) that presents a high second value (the number of rounds).

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a player can select an effect mode (for example, a character or a background), and the gaming machine 10 executes an effect according to the effect mode selected by the player. . In the following, description will be made using an example in which a player selects a character. First, in the gaming machine 10, characters that can be selected by a player and effects performed when each character is selected will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating the correspondence between the character and the effect according to the third embodiment.

  FIG. 125 shows the correspondence between characters that can be selected on the gaming machine 10 and effects that can be executed when each character is selected. In the gaming machine 10, the character A, the character B,..., The character N can be selected. When the character A is selected, the effects A1 to An can be executed. When the character B is selected. , The effects B1 to Bn can be executed. When the character N is selected, the effects N1 to Nn can be executed. The above is the correspondence between selectable characters and effects.

  Next, the timing at which selection (change) of a character can be received will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating a timing at which selection of a character according to the third embodiment can be accepted.

  The gaming machine 10 starts the symbol change at the timing T11 from the stop display (change stop) and starts the N-th change display. Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 starts a reach effect for deriving a deviation from the timing T12. After that, when the gaming machine 10 notifies the fluctuation display result (result mode: out) at the timing T13 and ends the reach effect, the selection (change) of the character is performed until the timing T14 when the N-th fluctuation display ends. A possible character selection effect (display of a character selection screen) is performed.

  According to this, when a reach effect for deriving a loss is performed in the variable display game, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to select (change) a character in the variable display game for which the reach effect for deriving the loss is performed. ) Can give the opportunity to do.

  For example, if the character selection effect is performed before the start of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect may change depending on the character selected by the player. Therefore, when preparing an effect up to the end of the change at the start of the change, the gaming machine 10 must prepare in advance all the effects corresponding to the characters to be options (characters that may be selected). I had to.

  On the other hand, when accepting the character selection after deriving the loss, the gaming machine 10 does not need to prepare a plurality of reach effects, and therefore performs the character selection effect after the end of the reach effect (after deriving the loss). Thus, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to select a character while suppressing the processing load.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 provides an opportunity to select a character after the reach effect that has derived the loss and allows the character to be changed, thereby providing an opportunity to switch feelings such as dissatisfaction caused by the occurrence of the loss. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from excessively sinking (inserting).

  Note that, depending on the gaming machine, the variable display may be ended when the effect control device receives a stop command issued by the game control device. In general, since the length of the reach effect (time to reach the off screen) is predetermined, such a gaming machine receives a stop command due to some error in the case of fluctuating stop after the reach effect (off screen display). If the reception is delayed, the reception is delayed and the user waits on the off screen, which may give a sense of incongruity to the player. In that regard, if the character selection effect (display of the character selection screen) is performed after the reach effect (display of the off-screen), such a gaming machine may have a character selection time even if the stop command is delayed due to some error. Can be lengthened, and the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced.

Next, an example of a screen at the time of the character selection reception effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment.
The screen 750 is a screen during the character selection effect (character selection screen). The screen 750 includes a selected character display 751, an option character display 752, an operation method display 753, an operation content display 754, and a timer display 755 in the display content.

  The selected character display 751 displays the currently selected character, that is, the changed character. On the screen 750, the selected character display 751 displays a tiger-like character, and indicates that the currently selected character is a tiger-like character.

  The option character display 752 displays selectable characters. The option character display 752 displays the currently selected character in a distinguishable manner. On the screen 750, the option character display 752 displays a tiger-like character, a pig-like character, and a lion-like character, and displays a tiger-like character, a pig-like character, and a lion-like character. Indicates that such a character can be selected. On the screen 750, the option character display 752 displays the background display of the tiger-like character so as to be distinguishable from the background display of other characters, and indicates that the currently selected character is a tiger-like character. .

  The operation method display 753 displays an operation method. On the screen 750, the operation method display 753 displays that the image of the push button (option setting unit 25) is displayed, thereby indicating that the selection of the character is performed by the push button.

  The operation content display 754 displays the operation content. On the screen 750, the operation content display 754 displays a message "Please select a favorite character" to indicate that the screen being displayed is a character selection screen.

  The timer display 755 displays the operation time. On the screen 750, the timer display 755 displays a timer in a bar format, and displays the remaining time of the selection operation in a display mode of the displayed timer in the bar format.

  Note that, when the gaming machine 10 does not receive any operation from the player in the character selection effect, the gaming machine 10 may select the character used in the immediately preceding reach effect, or may use the character used in the immediately preceding reach effect. A character different from the character may be selected.

  For example, the gaming machine 10 selects a character different from the character used in the immediately preceding reach effect, thereby promoting the change of the character and preventing the effect from being bored.

  In addition, although the case where the reach effect derives a loss has been described, the present invention is not limited thereto. Even when the reach effect derives a big hit, a character selection effect can be similarly performed after the result mode (big hit) is notified.

[Modification 1 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first modification of the third embodiment, a character selection effect is executed in the reach effect by replacing a part of the reach effect. The specific timing of the character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating timings at which a selection of a character according to the first modification of the third embodiment can be accepted.

  The timing chart shown in FIG. 128 shows that the gaming machine 10 starts symbol variation at timing T11, starts displaying the variation for the Nth time, and includes a plurality of rendering parts from timing T12. Is started, and the reach effect (out) is ended at timing T13.

  When the character selection effect is not performed in the Nth variation display, the gaming machine 10 performs the effect 1, the effect 2, and the effect 3 in the reach effect (between timing T12 and timing T13).

  On the other hand, when performing the character selection effect in the Nth variation display, the gaming machine 10 performs the effect 1, the effect 3, and the character selection effect in the reach effect (between timing T12 and timing T13).

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 replaces part of the effect with a character selection effect (by omitting a part of the effect and adding a character selection effect), thereby replacing the reach effect in the reach effect. A character selection effect can be performed (between timing T12 and timing T13).

[Modification 2 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a first modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second modification of the third embodiment, a character selection effect is performed after a reach effect for deriving a miss based on the number of effects performed on the selected character (the number of reach effects or the number of reach effects for deriving the miss). Is determined.

  A flow of determining whether or not to perform a character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a view illustrating an example of a flowchart of a loss effect setting process of Modification 2 of the third embodiment.

  The outlier effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect controller 300 in the effect display editing process in step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The loss effect setting process is a process of setting an effect mode of a reach effect for deriving a loss.

[Step D110] The control unit determines whether or not the number of effects performed on the currently selected character satisfies a predetermined condition.
For example, the control unit determines whether or not the number of effects performed with the currently selected character exceeds a predetermined number. Further, for example, the control unit determines whether or not the number of effects performed for the currently selected character is a predetermined number (10, 20, 30).

  The control unit proceeds to step D111 when determining that the number of effects performed by the currently selected character satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to step D112 when determining that the number of effects does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Step D111] The control unit sets an out-of-control effect mode with a character selection effect.
[Step D112] The control unit sets an out-of-control effect mode without a character selection effect.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the character selection effect when the number of effects of the selected character satisfies the predetermined condition. That is, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with a character selection opportunity at a timing when the number of effects of the selected character satisfies the predetermined condition. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character selection effect from being performed excessively.

[Third Modification of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third modification of the third embodiment, it is determined whether or not to perform the character selection effect after the reach effect for deriving the outlier based on the effect history.

  The flow of determining whether or not to perform a character selection effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of the off-set performance setting processing of Modification 3 of the third embodiment.

  The outlier effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect controller 300 in the effect display editing process in step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The loss effect setting process is a process of setting an effect mode of a reach effect for deriving a loss.

[Step D120] The control unit evaluates the effect history.
[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not the evaluation result satisfies a predetermined condition.
For example, the control unit evaluates the effect history and determines whether or not the effect recovery rate of the character (the ratio of the executed reach effects among the reach effects associated with the character) satisfies a certain ratio (predetermined condition). Is determined.

The control unit proceeds to Step D122 when determining that the evaluation result satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to Step D123 when determining that the evaluation result does not satisfy the predetermined condition.
[Step D122] The control unit sets an out-of-control effect mode with a character selection effect.

[Step D123] The control unit sets an out-of-control effect mode without a character selection effect.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the character selection effect when the effect history of the selected character satisfies the predetermined condition. That is, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with a character selection opportunity at a timing when the evaluation result of the effect history of the selected character satisfies the predetermined condition. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the character selection effect from being performed excessively.

[Modification 4 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fourth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In Modification 4 of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are made different based on the pre-read result. The flow of the process for changing the characters selectable on the character selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of a character selection effect setting process according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

  The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process of setting an effect mode of a character selection effect.

  [Step D130] The control unit determines whether or not there is a big hit in the suspension. When the control unit determines that there is a big hit in the hold, the process proceeds to step D131, and when it determines that there is no big hit in the hold, the process proceeds to step D132.

[Step D131] The control unit sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D132] The control unit sets a normal option pattern that does not include a special character as an option as an option on the character selection screen.

  In the above description, the special option pattern is set when there is a big hit in the hold, but the present invention is not limited to this. The gaming machine 10 may make the options different based on the result of the reservation pre-reading. For example, a special option pattern may be set when there is a reservation that exceeds a predetermined expected value.

  Next, a character selection screen when a special character is included in the options will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

  The screen 760 is a character selection screen that does not include a special character as an option. The option character display 752 displays characters such as a tiger, a character such as a pig, and a character such as a lion as options. Indicates a state in which

  The screen 761 is a character selection screen that includes a special character as an option. The option character display 752 includes a character such as a tiger, a character such as a pig, and a character such as a lion. The screen 760) shows a state in which a character like a tiger wearing sunglasses, which is not displayed, is displayed as an option.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen based on the pre-read result. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make the player have a sense of expectation for the effect performed in the subsequent variable display game.

[Modification Example 5 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fifth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth modification of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are made different based on the number of effects (the number of reach effects or the number of reach effects that derive the loss).

  The flow of the process of changing the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of a character selection effect setting process according to Modification 5 of the third embodiment.

  The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process of setting an effect mode of a character selection effect.

  [Step D140] The control unit determines whether or not the number of effects satisfies a predetermined condition. When the control unit determines that the number of effects satisfies the predetermined condition, the process proceeds to step D141. When the control unit determines that the number of effects does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the process proceeds to step D142.

[Step D141] The control unit sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D142] The control unit sets a normal option pattern that does not include a special character as an option as an option on the character selection screen.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen based on the number of effects.
By making it possible to select a special character according to the number of effects in this way, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value of the reach effect for deriving the loss (giving the reach effect for deriving the loss a value).

[Modification 6 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a sixth modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the sixth modification of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are made different based on the effect history. The flow of processing for making the characters selectable on the character selection screen different will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of a character selection effect setting process according to Modification 6 of the third embodiment.

  The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process of setting an effect mode of a character selection effect.

[Step D150] The control unit evaluates the effect history.
[Step D151] The control unit determines whether the evaluation result satisfies a predetermined condition.
The control unit proceeds to Step D152 when determining that the evaluation result satisfies the predetermined condition, and proceeds to Step D153 when determining that the evaluation result does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

[Step D152] The control unit sets a special option pattern including a special character as an option as an option on the character selection screen.
[Step D153] The control unit sets a normal option pattern that does not include a special character as an option as an option on the character selection screen.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen based on the effect history.
By making it possible to select a special character based on the effect history in this way, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value of the reach effect for deriving the loss (giving the reach effect for deriving the loss a value).

[Modification 7 of Third Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 of a modified example 7 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the modified example 7 of the third embodiment, the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen are changed according to the character that is currently selected. First, FIG. 135 will be described. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating an example of a flowchart of a character selection effect setting process of Modification 7 of the third embodiment.

  The character selection effect setting process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in the effect display editing process of step D23 of the main process (FIG. 102). The character selection effect setting process is a process of setting an effect mode of a character selection effect.

[Step D160] The control unit obtains an option pattern corresponding to the currently selected character.
[Step D161] The control unit sets the obtained option pattern as an option on the character selection screen.

  Next, the correspondence between the currently selected character and the option will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating an example of options according to a selected character in Modification 7 of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 136, when the selected character is a character 770 (a tiger-like character), a character 770, a character 771 (a pig-like character), and a character 772 (a lion-like character) ) And a character 773 (a character like a tiger wearing sunglasses) are options. That is, when the character 770 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771, the character 772, and the character 773 are options.

  If the character being selected is character 771, character 770, character 771, and character 772 are options. That is, when the character 771 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options.

  When the character being selected is the character 772, the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options. That is, when the character 772 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770, the character 771, and the character 772 are options.

  When the character being selected is the character 773, the character 770 and the character 773 are options. That is, when the character 773 is selected, the gaming machine 10 acquires an option pattern in which the character 770 and the character 773 are options. The above is the correspondence between the selected character and the option.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the characters that can be selected on the character selection screen according to the character being selected.
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment (including the first to seventh modifications) has the following features in one aspect.

  (1) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect unit (display device 41), an operation receiving unit (option setting unit 25: push button), and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The effect means can effect a variable display game in one effect mode set from among two or more effect modes (characters). The operation receiving means is capable of receiving a player operation. The control means derives a result mode (outlier) while leaving a predetermined operation selection time (T13 to T14 in FIG. 126) in the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display game, accepts a player operation in the selection operation time, and One effect mode is set from the above effect modes.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment delays the notification of the occurrence of the high probability state based on the inflow of the game ball into the V flow path 955a in the special game state from the detection time instead of the detection time of the specific area switch 460. At the right time. The gaming machine 10 is set to a high probability state based on detection of a game ball by the specific area switch 460.

  First, a hit corresponding to the special game state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a diagram illustrating an example of performance per hit in the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes “hit A” and “hit B” in hit types.

  The hit A has no probability fluctuation, that is, the probability state after the end of the hit is a low probability state. In the case of the hit A, the number of rounds during the hit is “9 (9R)”. The hit A is 6R for a short opening with a relatively short opening time and 3R for a long opening with a relatively long opening time, so the actual round number is “3 (3R)”.

  The hit B has a probability variation, that is, a high probability state in which the probability state after the end of the hit is higher than the low probability state. In addition, the number of rounds in the hit B and the hit is “9 (9R)”. In the case of the hit B, the short opening time is relatively short and the short opening time is 3R, and the long opening time is relatively long and the long opening time is 6R. Therefore, the actual round number is “6 (6R)”.

  Therefore, the winning B has a higher value for the player than the winning A because the real round number is large in terms of the number of winning balls. Further, the hit B is a higher hit than the hit A because the hit B becomes a high probability state from the viewpoint of the probability state after the end of the hit.

  Note that the high probability state is based on the game ball passing through the specific area. The hit A has only a high probability of a low probability state because it is difficult for a game ball to pass through a specific area, but does not deny a high probability state. Further, the hit B has a high probability of being in a high probability state because the game ball can easily pass through a specific area, but does not guarantee a high probability state.

Here, the game progress of the hit A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 138 is a timing chart showing an example of the game progress of the hit A in the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 enters the fanfare state due to the occurrence of the hit A, and thereafter, shifts to the round 1 and proceeds to the round 9 while advancing the round with an interval therebetween, and then ends the hit A through the ending.

  The hit A performs a fanfare effect in a fanfare state at a time of 10,000 ms. The hit A is a short opening of 1R for 100 ms. The hit A opens the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) for 100 ms at 1R, opens the V-door 520 at a predetermined timing, and creates a winning opportunity to the specific area switch 460. However, it is difficult to win the specific area switch 460 in the hit A. Based on the presence or absence of a prize in the specific area switch 460, the gaming machine 10 determines whether to produce a winning A (V winning) or a winning A (V non-winning).

  The hit A has a long release of 25000 ms from 2R to 4R, and a short release of 100 ms from 5R to 9R. That is, the actual number of rounds of the hit A is “3”. In the hit A, the interval between 1R and 2R is 2000 ms longer than the interval period 1000 ms between 2R and 9R.

  In the production of the hit A (V prize), the bonus production is performed from 1R to 3R, and the interval after 3R and 4R are the V prize production. In other words, the effect of winning A (V winning) is to notify the occurrence of the high probability state at a timing delayed from the game ball detection time instead of the game ball detection time of the specific area switch 460. In the production of the hit A (V prize), the ending production including the ending state of 2700 ms is performed from the interval after 4R to 9R.

  On the other hand, the effect of winning A (V non-winning) is a bonus effect from 1R to 4R. In the production of the hit A (V non-prize), an ending production including an ending state of 2700 ms is performed from the interval after 4R to 9R.

Next, the game progress of the hit B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 139 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the game progress of the hit B according to the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 enters the fanfare state due to the occurrence of the hit B, and thereafter, shifts to the round 1 and proceeds to the round 9 while advancing the round with an interval therebetween, and then ends the hit B through the ending.

  The hit B performs a fanfare effect in a fanfare state at a time of 10,000 ms. As for the hit B, 1R is a long open of 25000 ms. However, the opening mode is irregular, and details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. The winning B opens the large winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38) for a long time at 1R and opens the V-door 520 at a predetermined timing to create a winning opportunity to the specific area switch 460. However, it is easy to win the specific area switch 460 in the hit B. Based on the presence or absence of a prize in the specific area switch 460, the gaming machine 10 determines whether to produce a winning B (V prize) or a winning B (V non-prize).

  The contact B has a long release of 25000 ms from 1R to 6R, and a short release of 100 ms from 7R to 9R. That is, the winning B has a substantial round number of “6”. In the case of the hit B, the interval between 1R and 2R is set to 2000 ms longer than the interval period 1000 ms between 2R and 9R.

  In the production of the winning B (V prize), the bonus production is performed from 1R to 2R, and the interval after 2R and 3R are the V prize production. In other words, the effect of winning B (V prize) notifies the occurrence of the high probability state at a timing delayed from the game ball detection time instead of the game ball detection time of the specific area switch 460. In the production of the hit B (V prize), the bonus production is performed again from the interval after 3R to 6R, and the ending production including the ending state of 2700 ms from the interval after 6R to 9R.

  On the other hand, in the production of the winning B (V non-prize), the bonus production is performed from 1R to 2R, and the interval after 2R and 3R are V non-prize production. In the production of the hit B (V non-winning), a bonus production is performed again from the interval after 3R to 6R, and an ending production including the ending state of 2700 ms from the interval after 6R to 9R.

Next, the jackpot-related commands of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit command list according to the fourth embodiment.
The game control device 100 transmits an effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A. The effect control device 300 receives the effect command and performs a required game effect. The effect control device 300 can execute a process corresponding to the effect command received in the big hit command process (see FIG. 104) in step D58 of the received command analysis process.

The production command (reception command) is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte).
The big hit commands include a fanfare command, a special winning opening n-th command, an interval command, and an ending command. The fanfare command is specified by MODE “81H” and ACTION “01H”. The special winning opening n-th command is specified by MODE “82H” and any one of ACTION “01H” to “09H” corresponding to the number of rounds “n”. The interval command is specified by MODE “83H” and ACTION “01H”. The ending command is specified by MODE “84H” and ACTION “01H”.

  Next, the opening mode of the special winning opening on the 1R and 2R of the hit A and the opening mode of the special winning opening on the 1R of the hit B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart showing a mode of opening a special winning opening in the 1R and 2R of the hit A and a mode of opening a special winning opening in the 1R of the hit B according to the fourth embodiment.

  The winning A receives the first special winning opening opening command at timing t11, opens the special winning opening (special variable winning device 38), opens the V-door 520 at a required timing, and resets the specific area switch 460 Provide easy winning opportunities. The hit A receives the interval command at timing t12 and closes the special winning opening. Thereby, the winning A opens the special winning opening for a period Ta (for example, 100 ms). Note that the hit A receives the interval command without waiting for the elapse of the period Ta, when the winning of the required number (for example, nine) of game balls is detected before the elapse of the period Ta. Winning A receives the special winning opening second command at timing t13, and opens the special winning opening. Thereby, the winning A closes the special winning opening for a period Tb (for example, 2000 ms). Note that the winning A does not provide a winning opportunity to the specific area switch 460 after 2R. The hit A receives the interval command at timing t14 and closes the special winning opening. Thereby, the winning A opens the special winning opening for a period Tc (for example, 25000 ms). Note that the hit A receives the interval command without waiting for the elapse of the period Tc when the required number of game balls (for example, nine) is detected by the elapse of the period Tc.

  In this manner, the gaming machine 10 opens the special winning opening in the period Tc after the opening of the special winning opening in the period Ta from the start of the winning (1R), the closing of the special winning opening in the period Tb (interval). Perform

  Winning B receives the special winning opening opening first command at timing t11, opens the special winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 38), opens the V-door 520 at a required timing, and easily switches to the specific area switch 460. Prize opportunities. The winning B closes the special winning opening at timing t12. As a result, the winning B opens the special winning opening for a period Ta (for example, 100 ms). The winning B opens the special winning opening at timing t13. Thereby, the winning B closes the special winning opening for a period Tb (for example, 2000 ms). The winning B receives the interval command at timing t15 and closes the special winning opening. Thereby, the winning B opens the special winning opening for a period Td (for example, 22900 (= 25000-100-2000) ms). The hit B receives an interval command without waiting for the timing t15 when the required number (for example, nine) of the game balls is won from the timing t11 to the timing t15. Note that the winning B does not provide a winning opportunity to the specific area switch 460 after 2R.

  In this way, at the winning B, after the opening of the special winning opening in the period Ta (first opening of the 1R) from the start of the winning (1R), the gaming machine 10 passes through the closing of the special winning opening (weight) in the period Tb, The big winning opening is opened in the period Td (the second opening of the 1R).

  As a result, the gaming machine 10 opens the special winning opening from the timing t11 of the hit A to the timing t14 (1R, the interval (between 1R and 2R), and 2R), and the timing of the hit B from the timing t11 to the timing t15 (1R first opening). , Weight, and opening of the 1R 2nd winning opening).

  For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the winning opening opening timing and the winning opening closing timing to be the same for the 1R opening of the hit A and the 1R first opening of the winning B. In addition, the gaming machine 10 sets the winning opening closing timing and the winning opening opening timing to be the same for the interval between the 1R and 2R of the hit A and the 1R weight of the hit B. Naturally, the interval time between 1R and 2R of the hit A and the 1R wait time of the hit B are the same.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 does not display the round corresponding display from timing t11 to timing t13 after the occurrence of both the hit A and the hit B, and displays the round corresponding display after the timing t13. The round corresponding display is a display corresponding to the number of rounds. The round correspondence display is abstractly displayed instead of specifically indicating the number of rounds. The round corresponding display will be described later in detail.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to determine the winning A and the winning B based on the comparison between the opening of the winning prize opening of the winning A and the opening of the winning prize opening of the winning B. In addition, the gaming machine 10 does not perform V notification (high-probability state transition notice) at the time when the specific area switch 460 detects a game ball in both the hit A and the hit B. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult for the player to grasp the winning value until the V winning effect or the V non-winning effect is performed (after the end of 2R).

  Next, the relationship between the reception timing of the n-th command of opening the special winning opening and the display timing of the round corresponding display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating the reception timing of the n-th winning opening command and the display timing of the round corresponding display according to the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 142 (1) shows the relationship between the reception timing of the second winning port opening command at the hit A and the display timing of the round correspondence display. The gaming machine 10 receives the special winning opening second command for the winning A at timing t13. When the hit in progress is the hit A, the gaming machine 10 performs the round corresponding display triggered by the reception of the second winning port opening command.

  FIG. 142 (2) shows the relationship between the reception timing of the first winning opening opening command at the hit B and the display timing of the round correspondence display. The gaming machine 10 receives the first winning opening opening command for the winning B at timing t11. When the in-progress hit is the hit B, the gaming machine 10 performs the round corresponding display triggered by a timing t13 at which a set time (for example, 2100 ms) has elapsed from the reception of the first winning opening opening command.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can perform the round corresponding display at the same timing t13 for the hit A and the hit B.
Next, a display screen during a hit (hit A and hit B) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144. FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 144 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment.

  The display screen 1000 shown in FIG. 143 (1) is a display screen in the fanfare state, and displays a common fanfare effect for the hit A and the hit B. The display screen 1000 includes a bonus name 1001 which is a hit name in the effect. The bonus name 1001 displays a large hit name (for example, “X bonus”) in the effect common to the hit A and the hit B on the screen.

  The display screen 1002 shown in FIG. 143 (2) is a display screen following the display screen 1000 in the fanfare state, and includes a hitting direction display 1003. The hitting direction guidance display 1003 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right game area (right-handed) by displaying a rightward arrow large in the screen.

  The display screen 1004 shown in FIG. 143 (3) is displayed during the opening of the 1R of the hit A (short opening) and the subsequent interval period, and the first opening (short opening) of the 1R of the hit B and the subsequent wait period. Screen. The display screen 1004 includes a bonus name 1005, a hitting direction guidance display 1006, and a game description display 1007. The bonus name 1005 displays a winning name (for example, “X bonus”) on the effect common to the winning A and the winning B. The display screen 1004 displays the bonus name 1005 at a corner of the screen smaller than the well-known bonus name 1001 for confirmation. The hitting direction guidance display 1006 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right game area. The display screen 1004 displays a hitting direction guide display 1006 for confirmation, which is smaller at the corner of the screen than the well-known hitting direction guide display 1003. The game description display 1007 describes a mini game for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect. For example, the game description display 1007 displays "Put a ball in an attacker and accumulate a meter!" As a message. Note that the game description display 1007 may describe a mini game using pictograms, still images, moving images, and the like.

  The display screen 1008 shown in FIG. 143 (4) is a display screen in a period after the 2R opening (long opening) of the hit A and a period after the second opening (long opening) of the 1R of the hit B. That is, the display screen 1008 is a display screen during execution of the mini-game described in the display screen 1004 (during bonus effect). The display screen 1008 includes a bonus name 1005, a hitting direction guidance display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, an effect display 1010, and a meter display 1011.

  The round corresponding display 1009 displays a symbol (for example, a star display) corresponding to the round. The display screen 1008 shows three symbols in the round correspondence display 1009, and guides at least the number of remaining rounds to be currently presented and the current round. For example, the hatched symbols correspond to rounds being executed, and the solid white symbols correspond to scheduled rounds. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the progress of the round without specifying the specific number of rounds. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the hit A and the hit B having different timings at which the round corresponding display 1009 is started. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can make it difficult to distinguish between the winning A and the winning B having different substantial round numbers.

  The effect display 1010 effects a mini-game using characters, effect displays, and the like. The meter display 1011 includes a 16-step meter and a patrol lamp for notifying the success of the mini game. The 16-step meter is turned off in the initial state, and a predetermined step is turned on every time a prize is won in the special winning opening, and the mini game is successfully completed with all the lights.

  The display screen 1012 shown in FIG. 144 (1) is a display screen during execution of the mini game (during bonus effect), and is a display screen following the display screen 1008. The display screen 1012 includes a bonus name 1005, a hitting direction display 1006, a round corresponding display 1009, an effect display 1010, and a meter display 1011. The meter display 1011 on the display screen 1012 indicates a state in which the mini game progresses, that is, four out of the 16 steps are turned on based on winning in the special winning opening.

  A display screen 1014 shown in FIG. 144 (2) is a display screen when a V prize has been won. The display screen 1014 is a display screen during the V winning effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1012. The display screen 1014 includes a bonus name 1005, a hitting direction guidance display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, an effect display 1010, and a meter display 1011. The round correspondence display 1009 on the display screen 1014 guides the progress of the round by updating the hatched display symbol to a dashed white display symbol and updating one of the solid white display symbols to a hatched display symbol. The meter display 1011 on the display screen 1014 indicates a state in which the mini-game has succeeded, that is, 16 out of the 16 steps are turned on based on the winning in the special winning opening, and the patrol lamp notifies the success of the mini-game.

  A display screen 1016 shown in FIG. 144 (3) is a display screen during the V winning effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1014. The display screen 1016 includes a bonus name 1005, a hitting direction guide display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, and a V passing notification display 1017. The V passing notification display 1017 guides V passing (V winning). For example, V passage notification display 1017 displays pictogram “V”. The V passage notification display 1017 may be one that guides the V passage by a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

  The display screen 1018 shown in FIG. 144 (4) is a display screen during the bonus effect after the V winning effect in the win B. Note that the winning A shifts to the ending after the V prize production even if there is a V prize, so there is no bonus production after the V prize production.

  The display screen 1018 is a display screen following the display screen 1016. The display screen 1018 includes a bonus name 1005, a hitting direction guidance display 1006, a round correspondence display 1009, and an effect display 1010. The round correspondence display 1009 on the display screen 1018 guides the progress of the round by updating the hatched display symbol to a dashed white display symbol and updating one of the solid white display symbols to a hatched display symbol.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 sets a common effect for the hit A and the hit B, thereby making it difficult to determine the hit A and the hit B and setting a time lag in the notification regarding the probability variation. May include a jackpot where no time lag is set. For example, the gaming machine 10 includes a hit C for which a time lag is not set in the notification regarding the probability change.

  Here, the display screen during the hit C on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment.

  The display screen 1020 shown in FIG. 145 (1) is a display screen in a fanfare state, and displays a fanfare effect of hit C. The display screen 1020 includes a bonus name 1021 that is a hit name in the effect. The bonus name 1021 displays a large hit name (for example, “V bonus”) in the effect of the hit C on the screen.

  The display screen 1022 shown in FIG. 145 (2) is a display screen following the display screen 1020 in the fanfare state, and includes a hitting direction guide display 1023. The batting direction guidance display 1023 guides the player that the batting direction is the right game area (right-hand) by displaying a rightward arrow large in the screen.

  A display screen 1024 shown in FIG. 145 (3) is a display screen in the 1R opening period of the hit A. The display screen 1024 includes a bonus name 1025, a hitting direction guide display 1026, and a game description display 1027. The bonus name 1025 displays a hit name (for example, “V bonus”) in the effect of the hit C. The display screen 1024 displays the bonus name 1025 at a corner of the screen smaller than the well-known bonus name 1021 for confirmation. The hitting direction guide display 1026 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right game area. The display screen 1024 displays a hitting direction guide display 1026 at a corner of the screen smaller than the well-known hitting direction guide display 1023 for confirmation. The game explanation display 1027 explains that it is the timing to aim at V (specific area switch 460). For example, the game description display 1027 displays “Aim for V” as a message. Note that the game description display 1027 may be a pictogram, a still image, a moving image, or the like to explain the mini game.

  A display screen 1028 illustrated in FIG. 145 (4) is a display screen following the display screen 1024. The display screen 1028 includes a bonus name 1025, a hitting direction guide display 1026, a round correspondence display 1029, and a V passing notification display 1027. The round corresponding display 1029 guides the progress of the round in the same manner as the round corresponding display 1009. Although the round corresponding display 1029 is different from the round corresponding display 1009 in that four symbols are displayed, the number of symbols to be displayed may be changed according to the type of hit and the effect progress. The V passage notification display 1030 guides V passage (V winning) in the same manner as the V passage notification display 1017.

  Next, the correspondence between the round correspondence display and the round will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between round corresponding displays and rounds according to the fourth embodiment.

  The correspondence table shown in FIG. 146 (1) shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the display mode of the symbol three round correspondence display 1009 and the number of rounds of winning A and winning B. The display mode 1009a corresponds to 2R at the hit A and 1R at the hit B. In a display mode 1009a, three symbols are arranged in a line vertically, and the first symbol from the top is hatched to indicate a corresponding round, the second and third symbols are displayed in solid white, and there are two unfinished rounds. Indicates that In the display mode 1009b, the hit A corresponds to 3R, and the hit B corresponds to 2R. In a display mode 1009b, three symbols are arranged in a line vertically, the second symbol from the top is hatched, and the corresponding round is indicated. The first symbol is displayed in dashed white to indicate that there is one digested round. The third symbol is displayed in solid white to indicate that there is one undigested round. Display mode 1009c corresponds to 4R at hit A and 3R at hit B. In a display mode 1009c, three symbols are arranged in a line vertically, and the third symbol from the top is hatched to indicate a corresponding round. The first and second symbols are displayed in dashed white, and there are two digested rounds. Is shown. The hit B may be displayed in the same manner as 1R, 2R, and 3R for 4R, 5R, and 6R. In the round corresponding to the short opening, the round corresponding display 1009 can be hidden.

  The correspondence table shown in FIG. 146 (2) shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the display mode of the four symbol correspondence display 1009 and the number of rounds of winning A and winning B. The display mode 1009d does not correspond to the hit A, but corresponds to 1R at the hit B. In a display mode 1009d, four symbols are arranged in a line vertically, the first symbol from the top is hatched, and the corresponding round is indicated. The second, third, and fourth symbols are displayed in solid white and the unfinished round is displayed. Indicates that there are three. In the display mode 1009e, both the hit A and the hit B correspond to 2R. The display mode 1009e displays the corresponding round by arranging the four symbols in a vertical line and hatching the second symbol from the top to indicate the corresponding round, and displaying the first symbol with a dashed white display to indicate that there is one digested round, The third and fourth symbols are displayed in solid white to indicate that there are two unfinished rounds. In the display mode 1009f, the hit A and the hit B both correspond to 3R. In the display mode 1009f, four symbols are arranged in a line vertically, the third symbol from the top is hatched, and the corresponding round is indicated. The first and second symbols are displayed in dashed white, and there are two digested rounds. And the fourth symbol is displayed in solid white to indicate that there is one undigested round. The display mode 1009g corresponds to 4R for both the hit A and the hit B. In a display mode 1009g, four symbols are arranged in a line vertically, the fourth symbol from the top is hatched, and the corresponding round is shown. The first, second, and third symbols are displayed in dashed white and three digested rounds are displayed. Indicates that there is one.

  Next, display of the number of unit conversion rounds for guiding the player to the estimated number of rounds in place of not specifying the rounds will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between the number of rounds and the number of unit conversion rounds according to the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 147 (1) shows a correspondence table between the actual round number and the unit conversion round number. The hit type “hit A” is the number of rounds (formal round number) “9”, but the number of rounds for opening the special winning opening short is “6” and the number of rounds for opening the special winning opening is “3”. Therefore, the actual round number (corresponding to the number of rounds for opening the special winning opening) is “3”. The gaming machine 10 guides the player the unit conversion round number “1 Gao” corresponding to the real round number “3” instead of guiding the player to the real round number “3”.

  Similarly, the hit type “hit B” is the number of rounds (formal round number) “9”, but the number of rounds of opening the special winning opening is “3” and the number of rounds of opening the special winning opening is “3”. 6 ", the actual round number (corresponding to the number of rounds of opening the special winning opening) is" 6 ". The gaming machine 10 guides the player the unit conversion round number “2 Gao” corresponding to the real round number “6” instead of guiding the player to the real round number “6”.

This allows the gaming machine 10 to evaluate the winning value in a unit different from both the formal round number and the real round number.
FIG. 147 (2) shows a history table of the number of unit conversion rounds displayed corresponding to the hit. The history table includes a series of hit histories from the first time to the fourth time. The first hit is a hit type "hit B", and the hit B is "2 Gao" in the unit conversion round number display according to the correspondence table shown in FIG. 147 (1). Note that the gaming machine 10 first displays the unit conversion round number display “1 Gao” and then displays the unit conversion round number display “2 Gao” in order to display the winning value. Since the second hit is a hit type "hit B", the gaming machine 10 accumulates the hit unit conversion round number display "2gao" and displays the unit conversion round number display "3gao" and "4gao". indicate. The third hit is a hit type “hit A”, and the hit A is “1 Gao” in the unit conversion round number display according to the correspondence table shown in FIG. 147 (1). The gaming machine 10 accumulates the natural unit conversion round number display “4 Gao” and displays the unit conversion round number display “5 Gao”. Since the fourth hit is the hit type "hit B", the gaming machine 10 accumulates the unit conversion round number display "5 gaoh" before the hit and displays the unit conversion round number display "6 gaoh".

  This makes it easy for the gaming machine 10 to grasp the value of the number of rounds obtained by the cumulative winning. Further, in the gaming machine 10, it is easy to grasp the value of each winning constituting the cumulative winning. For example, some conventional gaming machines display the total number of rounds themselves and the total number of prize balls that can be acquired, but it is not easy to grasp the magnitude of the acquired value.

  Also, when displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of formal rounds may be confusing to the player because it does not represent the value that can be obtained, and displaying the actual number of rounds may cause a difference from the current gaming state. It can be confusing for players. Displaying the number of formal rounds and the number of real rounds in parallel may further confuse the player. In this respect, the unit conversion round number display has few points of giving a misunderstanding to the player, and can guide the winning value and the winning progress easily.

  Next, the unit conversion round number display will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. FIG. 148 is a diagram illustrating an example (Part 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 149 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 5) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment.

  The display screen 1100 shown in FIG. 148 (1) is a display screen during a bonus effect, and is a common display screen for the hit A and the hit B. The display screen 1100 includes a bonus name 1101, a hitting direction display 1102, a round correspondence display 1103, a unit conversion display 1104, and an effect display 1105. The bonus name 1101 displays a hit name (for example, “X bonus”) in the effect that is common to the hit A and the hit B. The hitting direction guidance display 1102 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right game area. The round corresponding display 1103 displays a symbol (for example, a star shape display) corresponding to the round. The round corresponding display 1103 displays three symbols, acquires the actual round number “3”, and indicates that one of the rounds is being executed. The gaming machine 10 does not need to clarify whether the hit type is the hit A or the hit B. The unit conversion display (unit conversion round number display) 1104 displays “1 Gao” in response to the acquisition of the actual round number “3”. The effect display 1105 produces a hit by a character, an effect display, and the like.

  A display screen 1106 shown in FIG. 148 (2) is a display screen during a bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1100. The round corresponding display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not need to clarify whether the hit type is the hit A or the hit B, and whether the hit is continuous. For example, when the hit type is hit A, six symbols can be displayed by two consecutive hits A, and when the hit type is hit B, six symbols can be displayed by one hit B. Can be displayed. In the case where the winning is continuous, the gaming machine 10 does not need to reset the round corresponding display for each winning. Further, the gaming machine 10 may be configured to reset the round corresponding display when the hits are continuous, for each hit, or in a predetermined case. The round correspondence display 1103 displays six symbols, indicates that three rounds have been completed, and that the number of real rounds “3” has been acquired, and that one of the rounds is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 displays “2 Gao” in response to the additional acquisition of the actual round number “3”.

  A display screen 1108 shown in FIG. 148 (3) is a display screen during a bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1106. The round corresponding display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 displays nine symbols, indicates that six rounds have been digested, and that the number of real rounds “3” has been acquired, and that one of the rounds is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1108 displays “3 Gao” in response to additional acquisition of the actual round number “3”.

  A display screen 1110 shown in FIG. 148 (4) is another example of the display screen 1108, and is a display screen following the display screen 1106. The round corresponding display 1103 additionally displays six symbols corresponding to the round. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can make the number of symbols to be additionally displayed variable. For example, in the case of the hit B, the gaming machine 10 can add six symbols at one time, or can add three symbols twice in three. The gaming machine 10 may be configured to arbitrarily set the symbol addition unit and the number of times of addition according to the hit type. The round correspondence display 1103 displays twelve symbols, indicates that six rounds have been completed, and that the number of real rounds “6” has been acquired, and that one of the rounds is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1110 displays “4 Gao” in response to the additional acquisition of the actual round number “6”.

  The display screen 1112 shown in FIG. 149 (1) is a display screen during a bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1108 or the display screen 1110. The round corresponding display 1103 temporarily resets the previously displayed symbols and then displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round corresponding display 1103 indicates that the number of real rounds “3” has been acquired by three symbols, and indicates that one of the rounds is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 displays “5 Gao” in response to the additional acquisition of the actual round number “3”.

  The display screen 1114 shown in FIG. 149 (2) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1112. The round corresponding display 1103 additionally displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round correspondence display 1103 displays six symbols, indicates that three rounds have been completed, and that the number of real rounds “3” has been acquired, and that one of the rounds is being executed. The unit conversion display 1104 shown on the display screen 1114 displays “6 Gao” in response to the additional acquisition of the actual round number “3”.

  The display screen 1116 shown in FIG. 149 (3) is a display screen during the bonus effect, and is a display screen following the display screen 1114. The round corresponding display 1103 temporarily resets the previously displayed symbols and then displays three symbols corresponding to the round. The round corresponding display 1103 indicates that the number of real rounds “3” has been acquired by three symbols, and indicates that one of the rounds is being executed. The gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily set the trigger for resetting the previously displayed symbol. For example, the display screen 1112 is triggered by resetting the display of twelve symbols, while the display screen 1116 is triggered by resetting display of six symbols. In this way, the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with an interest in the symbol reset timing by making the previously displayed symbol reset timing variable. For example, the gaming machine 10 may produce a sense of expectation according to the number of symbols being displayed, or may give a privilege effect (addition of a tune that can be heard, addition of a selectable character, etc.). . The unit conversion display 1104 displays “7 Gao” in response to the additional acquisition of the actual round number “3”. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 produces a sense of expectation or provides a bonus effect (addition of audible music, addition of a selectable character, etc.) according to the size of the unit conversion display being displayed. You may.

  Here, a modification of the unit conversion display (Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 153. The unit conversion display is not limited to the number of rounds, and can be any conversion target that can be measured, such as the number of winning balls, the number of winnings, the number of outs, the operating time, the number of fluctuations, the number of reach, the number of hits, etc. can do.

  As an example, unit conversion of the number of prize balls will be described. First, a model specification command of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example of a model specification command list according to Modification 1 of the fourth embodiment.

  The game control device 100 transmits a model specification command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A. The effect control device 300 receives the model specification command and performs a required prize ball number accumulation process. The effect control device 300 can execute processing corresponding to the received model specification command including the model specification command in the processing range of the single-shot command processing (see FIG. 104) in step D62 of the received command analysis processing. .

The model specification command (reception command) is configured to include MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte).
The model specification commands include a special winning opening count command, a starting winning opening winning command, a general winning opening command, and a general winning opening winning command. The special winning opening count command is a command by which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning to the special variable winning device 38. The special winning opening count command is specified by MODE “A7H” and ACTION “08H”. ACTION “08H” in the special winning opening count command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to winning in the special variable winning device 38, for example, eight. The start winning port winning command is a command that the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of a winning in the starting winning port 36. The start winning port winning command is specified by MODE “A8H” and ACTION “04H”. ACTION “04H” in the start winning port winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to winning in the starting winning port 36, for example, four. The normal electric winning command is a command that the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning to the normal variable winning device 37 (ordinary electric accessory). The general winning command is specified by MODE “A9H” and ACTION “01H”. ACTION “01H” in the normal winning award command indicates the number of award balls corresponding to winning in the starting winning opening 36, and is, for example, one. The general winning opening winning command is a command by which the game control device 100 notifies the effect control device 300 of winning in the general winning opening 35. The general winning opening winning command is specified by MODE “AAH” and ACTION “03H”. ACTION “03H” in the general winning opening winning command indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to winning in the general winning opening 35, and is, for example, three.

  Next, a unit conversion prize ball number display for guiding a player to a guide of the cumulative prize ball number instead of not explicitly indicating the cumulative prize ball number will be described with reference to FIG. 151. FIG. 151 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between the number of prize balls and the unit-converted prize ball number according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300, based on the special winning opening count command, the starting winning opening winning command, the ordinary winning opening command, and the general winning opening winning command, the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), the starting winning opening 36 ( The number of prize balls corresponding to each of the start winning prize port), the normal variable prize apparatus 37 (Public telephone), and the general prize port 35 (general prize port) can be obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 151 (1), the effect control device 300 determines that the number of prize balls “8” corresponding to winning in the special winning opening, the number of prize balls “4” corresponding to winning in the starting winning opening, It is possible to acquire the number of prize balls “1” corresponding to the prize in the normal power and the prize ball number “3” corresponding to the prize in the general prize port.

  This allows the effect control device 300 to calculate the cumulative number of prize balls according to the prize ball history, perform the required unit conversion, and display the unit conversion prize ball number that is the number of prize balls after the unit conversion. The effect control device 300 rounds down the first place of the accumulated prize ball count and converts it to a value whose unit is “pt”.

  FIG. 151 (2) shows a correspondence history table of the award ball history and the unit conversion award ball number display. The correspondence history table shows the number of award balls “1”, “3”, “4”, “8”, “8”, “8”, “8”, “3”, “8”, “8” in chronological order. "Indicates that a prize ball has occurred. The effect control device 300 determines the cumulative number of prize balls for a predetermined period based on the number of prize balls acquired in chronological order, the cumulative number of prize balls “1”, “4”, “8”, “16”, "24", "32", "40", "43", "51", "59" are obtained. The effect control device 300 rounds down the first place of the accumulated prize ball count and displays the unit conversion prize ball count display “0pt”, “0pt”, “0pt”, “10pt”, “20pt”, “30pt” in chronological order. , “40pt”, “40pt”, “50pt”, and “50pt”.

  According to this, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the cumulative prize ball count in an abstract manner without explicitly indicating the specific cumulative prize ball count to the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can intuitively inform the player of the magnitude of the numerical value to a player who takes a long time to acquire information or interpret the information because the numerical value is too specific.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily perform a required unit conversion, including selection of a conversion target and a conversion formula. In the gaming machine 10, the unit conversion is performed on the game history, but the unit conversion may be performed on the expected game result such as the expected number of winning balls. Further, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily set an accumulation period, and can reset the accumulation value by an event trigger or a timer trigger, for example, 10 minutes per round, for example.

Next, the unit conversion prize ball number display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed by the display device according to the first modification of the fourth embodiment.
The display screen 1120 shown in FIG. 152 (1) is the display screen at the start of the bonus effect. The display screen 1120 includes a bonus name 1121, a hitting direction display 1122, and an expected expected value display 1123. The bonus name 1121 displays a hit name in an effect (for example, “X bonus”). The batting direction guidance display 1122 guides the player that the batting direction is the right game area. The acquired expected value display 1123 is obtained by adding a predetermined unit (for example, “pt”) to a value obtained by converting the number of acquired prize balls expected (acquired expected prize ball number) according to the hit type, and obtaining the expected expected value (for example, , “240 pt”).

  The display screen 1124 shown in FIG. 152 (2) is a display screen during the bonus effect and is a display screen following the display screen 1120. The display screen 1124 includes a bonus name 1121, a hitting direction display 1122, and an acquired value display 1125. The acquired value display 1125 adds a predetermined unit (for example, “pt”) to a value obtained by converting the number of prize balls acquired during winning (the number of acquired prize balls) to give an acquired value (for example, “240 pt”). Show. Note that the gaming machine 10 may stop updating the acquired prize ball number with the acquired expected prize ball number being the upper limit when the number of acquired prize balls exceeds the estimated expected prize ball number. Further, the gaming machine 10 may be a target for calculating the number of acquired prize balls only for a prize in a winning opening (for example, a large winning opening) for which the number of expected winning prize balls is calculated.

  A display screen 1126 shown in FIG. 152 (3) is another example of the display screen 1124 and is a display screen following the display screen 1120. The display screen 1126 includes a bonus name 1121, a hitting direction display 1122, and an acquired value display 1127. The acquired value display 1127 adds a predetermined unit (for example, “pt”) to a value obtained by converting the number of prize balls acquired during a hit (the number of acquired prize balls) to give an acquired value (for example, “250 pt”). Show. Note that, when the gaming machine 10 acquires the expected prize ball number exceeding the expected expected prize ball number, the gaming machine 10 updates the acquired prize ball number by permitting the acquired expected prize ball number to be exceeded. Further, the gaming machine 10 calculates a winning prize (for example, a prize to a general winning prize) which is not limited to a prize prize (for example, a grand prize prize) for which the number of expected prize spheres to be calculated is calculated. It may be targeted.

  Although the gaming machine 10 converts the cumulative number of prize balls into units, the gaming machine 10 may convert the number of prize balls beforehand and then calculate the cumulative value. First, the unit conversion prize ball number display for converting the number of prize balls into units and obtaining the cumulative value of the converted value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of accumulated points according to Modification Example 1 of the fourth embodiment.

  The effect control device 300, based on the special winning opening count command, the starting winning opening winning command, the ordinary winning opening command, and the general winning opening winning command, the special variable winning device 38 (large winning opening), the starting winning opening 36 ( The number of prize balls corresponding to each of the start winning prize port), the normal variable prize apparatus 37 (Public telephone), and the general prize port 35 (general prize port) can be obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153 (1), the effect control device 300 determines that the number of prize balls “8” corresponding to winning in the special winning opening, the number of prize balls “4” corresponding to winning in the starting winning opening, It is possible to acquire the number of prize balls “1” corresponding to the prize in the normal power and the prize ball number “3” corresponding to the prize in the general prize port.

  The effect control device 300 performs necessary unit conversion on the acquired number of prize balls. The effect control device 300 multiplies the prize ball number by 10 and converts the value into a value whose unit is “pt”. According to this, the number of large winning prize balls is a point (unit conversion prize ball) of “80 pt”, the number of starting winning prize balls is a point of “40 pt”, and the number of the Puden prize balls is a point of “10 pt”. Then, the number of general winning opening prize balls can be converted into points "30 pt".

  FIG. 153 (2) shows a correspondence history table of the award ball history and the accumulated point number. The correspondence history table shows the number of award balls “1”, “3”, “4”, “8”, “8”, “8”, “8”, “3”, “8”, “8” in chronological order. "Indicates that a prize ball has occurred. Based on the points after the unit conversion of the number of prize balls acquired in chronological order, the effect control device 300 determines the cumulative number of points for a predetermined period as the cumulative points “10pt”, “40pt”, “80pt”, "160pt", "240pt", "320pt", "400pt", "430pt", "510pt", "590pt" are obtained.

  According to this, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the abstract cumulative points without explicitly indicating the specific cumulative number of prize balls to the player. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can notify the player of the image given by the specific numerical value as an abstract image.

  Note that the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily perform a required unit conversion, including selection of a conversion target and a conversion formula. In the gaming machine 10, the unit conversion is performed on the game history, but the unit conversion may be performed on the expected game result such as the expected number of winning balls. Further, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily set an accumulation period, and can reset the accumulation value by an event trigger or a timer trigger, for example, 10 minutes per round, for example.

  The description returns to the fourth embodiment. The V winning effect and the V non-winning effect have been briefly described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 145, but will be described again in detail with reference to FIGS. 154 to 160.

  First, the hit type will be described again with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance table for each hit including the presence or absence of the V notification game according to the fourth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 includes “hit A”, “hit B”, “hit C”, and “hit D” in hit types.

  The hit A has no change in probability and has a V notification game. The hit B has a probability change and a V notification game. The hit C has no probability change and no V notification game. The hit D has a probability variation and does not have the V notification game. In addition, a certain hit (hit A and hit B) of the V notification game performs a certain effect of the V notification game (mini game) for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect. Some hits in the V notification game are notified of the probability change via the V notification game, and hits without the V notification game (hit C and hit D) are notified of the probability change without passing through the V notification game.

Here, the probability variation notification for each hit will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game flow of probability variation notification for each hit according to the fourth embodiment.
The game flow shown in FIG. 155 (1) is a game flow of winning A and winning B. The hit A and the hit B play the V notification game in the hit effect. The hit A and the hit B notify the player of the success or failure of the V prize (detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 460) without guiding the player to aim at "V (specific area)" (non-guidance to aim at V). I do. That is, the gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V winning (V winning success notification) when the winning is achieved at the winning A and the winning B, and notifies the failure of the V winning when the winning is not performed (the V winning failure). Information). The gaming machine 10 determines the V notification game in accordance with the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 460, and can perform the V winning success notification or the V winning failure notification in accordance with the result of the V notification game. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 provides a V-prize success notification or a V-prize failure notification later than the game ball detection timing of the specific area switch 460 by providing the effect time of the V notification game.

  The game flow shown in FIG. 155 (2) is a game flow of winning C. The hit C does not play the V notification game in the hit effect and does not guide the player to aim for “V”. The gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V prize in the case of the winning C at the time of the V prize, but does not inform the failure of the V prize when the V prize does not exist because the V aim is not guided. (Notification of V prize failure).

  The game flow shown in FIG. 155 (3) is a game flow of winning D. The hit D guides the player to aim for “V” without performing the V notification game in the hit effect (V aim guidance). That is, the gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V prize at the winning D when there is a V prize, and notifies the failure of the V prize when there is no V prize. Note that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily need to notify the winning D at the winning D.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 detects whether the high-probability state has occurred after the game ball detection timing of the specific area switch 460 (hit A and hit B) and the game ball detection of the specific area switch 460. It is possible to set a hit (hit C and hit D) at which the notification of the occurrence of the high probability state is made at the time.

Next, a game flow of the V notification game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of a game flow of the V notification game of the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 performs game guidance in the V notification game (F100). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 informs the player of the V notification game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 directs the player's interest to the game guidance, thereby suppressing the player's interest from turning to the special variable winning device 38 and the V-door 520 being opened.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a first game effect as a V notification game (F101). The first game effect corresponds to the mini game described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 145. The gaming machine 10 performs a first game success effect in a part of the case where there is a V prize (F102), and thereafter, performs a V prize success notification (F103).

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 performs the first game failure effect in the remaining part when there is a V winning and when there is no V winning (F104). The gaming machine 10 performs a V winning failure notification in a part of the case where there is no V winning (F105).

  The gaming machine 10 performs a second game effect as a first game failure resurrection effect with the remaining part when there is a V winning and the remaining part when there is no V winning (F106). The second game effect is a game effect different from the first game effect, for example, a game effect that requires a player to press the push button 25.

  If there is a V prize and the press operation of the push button 25 is detected within a predetermined time (non-timeout), the gaming machine 10 performs the second game success effect (F107), and thereafter, notifies the V prize success notification. (F103).

  On the other hand, when there is no V winning, and when the pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected within a predetermined time (non-timeout), the gaming machine 10 performs the second game failure effect (F108). Notification is performed (F105).

  Further, when the pressing operation of the push button 25 is not detected within a predetermined time (timeout), the gaming machine 10 performs a time-out effect (F109). Then, after the time-out effect, the gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V winning if there is a V winning (F103), and notifies the failure of the V winning if there is no V winning (F105).

Next, the progress of the V notification game at the hit B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of the V notification game at the hit B in the fourth embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 enters a fanfare state (FAN) when the hit B occurs, and performs a fanfare effect. The gaming machine 10 proceeds from the fanfare state to 1R (round), releases the V blockage, that is, opens the V door 520, and enables the specific area switch 460 to detect a game ball. The gaming machine 10 performs game guidance at 1R and an interval (INT) following 1R. The gaming machine 10 performs the first game effect at 2R and an interval following 2R. The gaming machine 10 performs a first game success effect or a first game failure effect at 3R and an interval following 3R. When the first game success effect is performed at 3R and the interval following 3R, the gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V prize from 4R to 6R.

  When the first game failure effect is performed at the 3R and the interval following the 3R and the second game effect is not performed, the gaming machine 10 notifies the failure of the V winning from 4R to 6R. The gaming machine 10 performs the second game effect at the intervals following 4R and 4R when the first game failure effect is performed at 3R and the interval following 3R, and when the second game effect is performed.

  When the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 within the predetermined time in the second game effect, the gaming machine 10 performs the second game success effect or the second game failure effect until the end of the interval following 4R according to the presence or absence of the V winning. Do it. The gaming machine 10 notifies the success of the V prize from 5R to 6R when the second game success effect is performed, and notifies the failure of the V prize from 5R to 6R when the second game failure effect is performed.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a time-out effect if the pressing operation of the push button 25 is not detected within a predetermined time in the second game effect. After performing the time-out effect, the gaming machine 10 performs V-prize success notification or V-prize failure notification from 5R to 6R depending on whether or not there is a V winning.

After performing the V winning success notification or the V winning failure notification, the gaming machine 10 performs an ending effect including an ending (END) state after the interval following 6R.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined time lag for the success or failure of the V prize (detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 460) and perform the V prize success notification or the V prize failure notification. The gaming machine 10 can set such a time lag as a predetermined period after the V winning. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag based on the detection of a winning in the special winning opening after the V winning timing (for example, a special winning opening in a mini game). Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a timing from a V winning timing to a detection of a player operation (for example, a pressing operation of the push button 25) as a time lag. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by issuing a V winning success notification or a V winning failure notification after the end of the round with the V winning timing. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by issuing a V winning success notification or a V winning failure notification after the next round of the round with the V winning timing. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a multi-stage time lag by setting two or more notification opportunities (for example, the first game effect and the second game effect) after the V winning timing.

  Next, a display screen during the V notification game on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 6) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 7) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 8) of a screen displayed by the display device of the fourth embodiment.

The display screen during the V notification game will be described in association with the game flow of the V notification game (see FIG. 156).
The display screen 1130 shown in FIG. 158 (1) is a display screen for performing game guidance (F100) in the V notification game. Display screen 1130 includes game description display 1132. The game description display 1132 describes a mini game for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect, and informs the player of the V notification game (first game). For example, the game description display 1132 displays "Put a ball in an attacker and accumulate a meter!" As a message.

  The display screen 1134 shown in FIG. 158 (2) is a display screen for performing the first game effect (F101) in the V notification game. The display screen 1134 includes a meter display 1136 and an event display 1137. The meter display 1136 includes a 16-step meter and a patrol lamp for reporting success of the mini game. The 16-step meter is turned off in the initial state, and a predetermined step is turned on every time a prize is won in the special winning opening, and the mini game is successfully completed with all the lights. The event display 1137 produces an event corresponding to a winning in the special winning opening. For example, the event display 1137 emits a light beam in the direction of the meter display 1136 from the direction of the special variable prize winning device 38 every time a prize is won to the special winning opening, and turns on the meter for a predetermined step as shown on a display screen 1138 shown in FIG. 158 (3). .

  The display screen 1140 shown in FIG. 158 (4) is a display screen for performing the first game success effect (F102) in the V notification game. Display screen 1140 includes meter display 1136 and successful effect display 1141. In the meter display 1136, the meters of all 16 steps are turned on. The success effect display 1141 notifies the success of the mini game (first game) by the display mode of the patrol lamp (for example, flashing).

  The display screen 1142 shown in FIG. 159 (1) is a display screen for performing the V winning success notification (F103) in the V notification game. The display screen 1142 includes a V winning success notification display 1143. The V prize success notification display 1143 displays a pictogram "V" to notify the success of the V prize. The V-prize success notification display 1143 may be a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like, for notifying the V-prize success.

  The display screen 1144 shown in FIG. 159 (2) is a display screen for performing the first game failure effect (F104) in the V notification game. The display screen 1144 includes a meter display 1136 and a failure effect display 1145. In the meter display 1136, at least a part of the 16-step meter is turned off. The failure effect display 1145 reports the mini-game failure by the display mode of the patrol lamp (for example, failure).

  The display screen 1146 shown in FIG. 159 (3) is a display screen for performing a V winning failure notification (F105) in the V notification game. The display screen 1146 includes a V winning award failure notification display 1147. The V winning award failure notification display 1147 displays a message “sorry” and notifies the failure of the V winning. Note that the V-prize failure notification display 1147 may be used to notify the V-prize failure by a pictogram, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

  The display screen 1148 shown in FIG. 159 (4) is a display screen for performing the second game effect (F106) in the V notification game. The display screen 1148 includes a game description display 1149 and a time-up display 1150. The game description display 1149 describes a player operation for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect, and informs the player of the V notification game (second game). For example, the second game is a game for notifying the success or failure of the V winning by detecting a pressing operation of the push button 25 within a predetermined time. The game description display 1149 displays an image of the push button 25 corresponding to the player operation unit as a message “press!” As a message and a pictogram. The time-up display 1150 displays a predetermined time (time-up time) for detecting a pressing operation of the push button 25 as a gauge.

  The display screen 1152 shown in FIG. 160 (1) is a display screen for performing the second game success effect (F107) in the V notification game. The display screen 1152 includes a successful effect display 1153. The success effect display 1153 notifies the success of the mini game (second game) by flashing the image of the push button 25.

  The display screen 1154 shown in FIG. 160 (2) is a display screen for performing the second game failure effect (F108) in the V notification game. The display screen 1154 includes a failure effect display 1155. The failure effect display 1155 notifies the failure of the mini game (second game) when the image of the push button 25 loses saturation and brightness.

  The display screen 1156 shown in FIG. 160 (3) is a display screen for performing a time-out effect (F109) in the V notification game. The display screen 1156 includes a time-out effect display 1157. The time-out effect display 1157 reports a time-out of the mini game (second game) when the image of the push button 25 loses saturation and brightness.

  Next, a second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 163. The gaming machine of the second modification of the fourth embodiment includes a hit X that sets the timing of releasing the V blockage to an intermediate round (4R) instead of the first round (1R).

  First, the progress of the V notification game at the hit X will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating an example of the progress of the V notification game at the hit X in Modification 2 of the fourth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 enters a fanfare state (FAN) due to the occurrence of the hit X, and performs a fanfare effect. The gaming machine 10 progresses from the fanfare state to 1R (round), and performs game guidance in an interval (INT) following 1R to 3R. The gaming machine 10 performs the game effect 1 at 4R and an interval following 4R. In the 4R, the gaming machine 10 releases the V blockage, that is, opens the V door 520, and enables the specific area switch 460 to detect a game ball.

  The gaming machine 10 performs V winning failure notification, a successful game 1 effect, or a game effect 2 after the 5R. When performing the V winning award failure notification after the game effect 1, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period from 5R to 9R. When performing the game 1 success effect or the game effect 2, the gaming machine 10 sets the effect period to 5R and an interval following 5R. When the game 1 has performed the successful production of the game 1, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period of the V winning prize success notification from 6R to 9R.

  When the game effect 2 is performed, the gaming machine 10 performs the V winning prize failure notification, the game 2 success effect, or the game effect 3 after 6R. When performing the V winning award failure notification after the game effect 2, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period from 6R to 9R. When performing the game 2 success effect or the game effect 3, the gaming machine 10 sets the effect period to 6R and the interval following 6R. In the case where the gaming machine 10 has performed the game 2 success effect, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period of the V-prize success notification from 7R to 9R.

  When the game effect 3 is performed, the gaming machine 10 performs the game 3 success effect at the intervals following 7R and 7R. That is, the game effect 3 is a V winning success determination effect in which there is only success without failure. When performing the game 3 success effect, the gaming machine 10 sets the notification period of the V winning success notification from 8R to 9R.

The gaming machine 10 performs an ending effect in an ending (END) state after performing the V winning success notification or the V winning failure notification.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined time lag for the success or failure of the V prize (detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 460) and perform the V prize success notification or the V prize failure notification. The gaming machine 10 can set such a time lag as a predetermined period after the V winning. Further, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by issuing a V winning success notification or a V winning failure notification after the end of the round with the V winning timing. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a time lag by issuing a V winning success notification or a V winning failure notification after the next round of the round with the V winning timing. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a multi-stage time lag by setting two or more notification opportunities (for example, game effect 1, game effect 2, and game effect 3) after the V winning timing.

  Next, a display screen during the V notification game on the display device 41 according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 and 163. FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device according to the second modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device in the modification 2 of the fourth embodiment.

  A display screen 1160 shown in FIG. 162 (1) is a display screen for providing game guidance in the V notification game. The display screen 1160 includes a game description display 1162. The game description display 1162 describes a game for a V winning effect or a V non-winning effect, and informs the effect contents. For example, the game description display 1162 displays “Win the game!” As a message.

  The display screen 1164 shown in FIG. 162 (2) is a display screen for performing a game effect (common to the effect games 1, 2, and 3) in the V notification game. Display screen 1164 includes an event display 1168. The event display 1168 produces a match between two characters 1168a and 1168b. Character 1168a corresponds to the main character, and character 1168b corresponds to the enemy character. Note that the game effects are common to the effect games 1, 2, and 3, but may be different.

  The display screen 1170 shown in FIG. 162 (3) is a display screen for performing a game success effect (common to the effect games 1, 2, and 3) in the V notification game. The display screen 1170 includes a game success display 1171. The game success display 1171 shows that the character 1168a has won the character 1168b. Note that the game success effect is common to the effect games 1, 2, and 3, but may be different.

  The display screen 1172 shown in FIG. 162 (4) is a display screen for performing a V winning success notification in the V notification game. The display screen 1172 includes a V winning success notification display 1173. The V prize success notification display 1173 displays a pictogram “V” to notify the success of the V prize. The V-prize success notification display 1173 may be a message, a still image, a moving image, or the like, for notifying the V-prize success.

  The display screen 1174 shown in FIG. 163 (1) is a display screen for performing a game failure effect (common to the effect games 1 and 2) in the V notification game. The display screen 1174 includes a game failure display 1175. Game failure display 1175 shows that character 1168a has been defeated by character 1168b. Note that the game failure effect is common to the effect games 1 and 2, but may be different.

  The display screen 1176 shown in FIG. 163 (2) is a display screen for performing a V winning failure notification in the V notification game. The display screen 1176 includes a V winning failure notification display 1177. The V prize failure notification display 1177 displays a message “sorry” and notifies the V prize failure. Note that the V-prize failure notification display 1177 may display a V-prize failure by a pictogram, a still image, a moving image, or the like.

  The display screen 1178 shown in FIG. 163 (3) is a display screen for performing a game effect (effect game 2) in the V notification game. The display screen 1178 includes an event display 1179. The event display 1179 produces a second game between the two characters 1168a and 1168b.

  The display screen 1180 shown in FIG. 163 (4) is a display screen for performing a game effect (effect game 3) in the V notification game. The display screen 1180 includes an event display 1181. The event display 1181 produces a third match between the two characters 1168a and 1168b.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes winning means (special fluctuation winning device 38), detecting means (specific area switch 460), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The winning means includes a first state (short open) for easily accepting game balls in the first period, a second state (long open) for easy reception of game balls in a second period longer than the first period, and a game. The third state (blockage) that makes the ball difficult to receive can be converted. The detecting means can detect a game ball accepted by the winning means. The control means may be a first special game state (hit A) which can transition to a specific game state (probability variation (high probability state)) when the detection means detects a game ball in the first state, or in the second state. When the detecting means detects a game ball, a second special game state (hit B) capable of transitioning to a specific game state can be generated, and a second special game state is generated from the first special game state occurrence in the first special game state. The first elapsed period until the conversion to the state is the same as the second elapsed period from the occurrence of the second special game state to the conversion to the second state in the second special game state (Ta + Tb (FIG. 141)). ).

  (2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) includes a display effect means (display device 41) for performing a display effect. The control means waits for the lapse of the first and second lapsed periods, and performs a notification display (round correspondence display 1009) on the round by the display effecting means.

  (3) The control means of (1) or (2) sets the first state in one round (1R) in the first special game state, and in the second round (2R) sandwiching the third state (interval). The second state is set, and the second state is set with the third state (weight) being interposed from the first state in one round in the second special game state.

  (4) The gaming machine 10 includes winning means (special fluctuation winning device 38), detecting means (specific area switch 460), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The winning means can convert between a first state (open) in which game balls are easily accepted and a second state (closed) in which game balls are difficult to accept. The detecting means can detect the game ball accepted by the winning means at a predetermined timing. The control means is a first special game state capable of transitioning to a specific game state when the detection means detects a game ball in the first state, or a specific game state when the detection means detects a game ball in the second state. A second special game state capable of transitioning to (probability fluctuation (high probability state)) can be generated, and the transition notification to the specific game state based on the detection result of the game ball by the detection means is time-lagged with respect to a predetermined timing. (For example, the first game effect).

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, a symbol is composed of two or more identification elements, and the identification elements can be selectively displayed in a change process. First, a decorative pattern (decorative pattern) according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example of a decorative pattern according to the fifth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 can selectively display a decorative symbol A, a decorative symbol B, and a decorative symbol C as decorative symbols. The decorative pattern A is a decorative pattern mainly used, and the decorative pattern B and the decorative pattern C are decorative patterns used as slaves. For example, the decorative symbol A is used during a variable display effect without using a movie, and the decorative symbol B and the decorative symbol C are used during a variable display effect using a movie.

  The decorative design A includes designs 1201, 1202, 1203, 1204 and 1205. The symbols 1201, 1202, 1203, 1204, and 1205 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

  The symbol 1201 is a symbol that displays the number “1”. The pattern 1201 is a graphic element 1201a having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a graphic (for example, a character like a boy), a numerical element 1201b having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a numeral “1”, and a graphic by a character “Taro”. And a character element 1201c having a distinctive character. That is, the graphic element 1201a, the number element 1201b, and the character element 1201c are identification elements of the design 1201.

  The symbol 1202 is a symbol that displays the number “2”. The pattern 1202 is composed of a graphic element 1202a having distinctiveness as a pattern by a graphic (for example, a character like a girl), a numerical element 1202b having distinctiveness as a pattern by a numeral “2”, and a graphic element by a character “Hanako”. And a character element 1202c having an identification characteristic of That is, the graphic element 1202a, the number element 1202b, and the character element 1202c are the identification elements of the pattern 1202, respectively.

  The symbol 1203 is a symbol that displays the number “3”. The pattern 1203 is composed of a graphic element (eg, a tiger-like character) having a distinctiveness as a pattern, a numeral “3”, a numerical element 1203b having a distinctiveness as a pattern, and the character “Tiger” as a graphic. And a character element 1203c having an identification characteristic of That is, the graphic element 1203a, the number element 1203b, and the character element 1203c are identification elements of the design 1203, respectively.

  The symbol 1204 is a symbol that displays the number “4”. The pattern 1204 is composed of a graphic element (eg, a lion-like character) having a distinctiveness as a pattern, a numeral “4”, a numerical element 1204b having a distinctiveness as a pattern, and the character “lion” as a graphic. And a character element 1204c having an identification characteristic of That is, the graphic element 1204a, the number element 1204b, and the character element 1204c are identification elements of the design 1204, respectively.

  The symbol 1205 is a symbol for displaying the number “5”. The pattern 1205 is composed of a graphic element 1205a having a distinctiveness as a symbol by a graphic (for example, a character like a rocket), a numeral element 1205b having a distinctiveness as a symbol by a numeral “5”, and a symbol by a character “rocket”. And a character element 1205c having a distinctive characteristic of That is, the graphic element 1205a, the number element 1205b, and the character element 1205c are identification elements of the pattern 1205, respectively.

  The decorative symbol B is a symbol having the same discriminating power as the numeral elements in the decorative symbol A, and is, for example, similar to the numeral element in the decorative symbol A. The decorative symbol B includes symbols 1211, 1212, 1213, 1214, and 1215. The symbols 1211, 1212, 1213, 1214, and 1215 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

  The decorative pattern C is a pattern having the same discriminating power as the character elements in the decorative pattern A, and is, for example, similar to the character element in the decorative pattern A. The decorative symbol C includes symbols 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, and 1225. The symbols 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, and 1225 can be distinguished from other symbols by different display modes.

The gaming machine 10 can use the decorative symbol A, the decorative symbol B, and the decorative symbol C simultaneously or exclusively in accordance with the display effect.
Next, a representative display mode during the change in the decorative symbol A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example of a changing display mode in the decorative symbol A according to the fifth embodiment.

  The changing display mode of the decorative symbol A will be described using the symbol 1201 as a representative. Note that the symbols 1202, 1203, 1204, and 1205 are the same as the symbols 1201 and will not be described.

  The pattern 1201 displays all of the graphic element 1201a, the number element 1201b, and the character element 1201c when the pattern is stopped (P1). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can sufficiently exhibit the effect of the design 1201.

  At the start of the change, the pattern 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c, and displays the numeric element 1201b (P2). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can simplify the display content, and can enhance the discriminating power of the symbol 1201 that starts to fluctuate.

  During the change, the pattern element 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c, and displays the numeric element 1201b transparently (P3). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can sufficiently exhibit the effect of the background, the movie, the character, and the like.

  The pattern 1201 hides the graphic element 1201a and the character element 1201c and displays the numeric element 1201b before stopping the fluctuation (P4). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can simplify the display content, and can enhance the discriminating power of the symbol 1201 before the change stop.

  The pattern 1201 displays the character element 1201c while hiding the graphic element 1201a and the numeral element 1201b as a first stage before stopping the fluctuation (P5). That is, the pattern 1201 switches the display target from the numeric element 1201b to the character element 1201c. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can diversifyly enhance the discriminating power of the symbol 1201 before the fluctuation stop. Further, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the number elements 1201b and the character elements 1201c.

  The pattern 1201 displays all of the graphic element 1201a, the number element 1201b, and the character element 1201c as the second stage before the stop of the change (P6). That is, the pattern 1201 switches the display target from the character element 1201c only to the graphic element 1201a, the number element 1201b, and the character element 1201c. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can sufficiently exhibit the effect of the design 1201. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can increase the discriminating power of the symbol 1201 before the stop of the movement from various angles. Further, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the character element 1201c and the graphic element 1201a. Further, the gaming machine 10 can further emphasize the correspondence between the number elements 1201b and the character elements 1201c.

  Such a gaming machine 10 is effective when the discriminating power of the graphic element 1201a, the numeral element 1201b, and the character element 1201c is not the same. For example, when similar characters (girls A, B, C, D, E) are used as graphic elements in a plurality of designs, the graphic elements cannot be distinguished at a glance. In such a case, the gaming machine 10 can emphasize the correspondence between the graphic element, the number element, and the character element, and can display each of the graphic element and the number element, the graphic element and the character element, and the number element and the character element. Makes binding easier. Such ease of linking is an effect that cannot be obtained by simply presenting graphic elements, numeric elements, and character elements at the same time.

Next, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen on the display device of the fifth embodiment.
The display screen 1250 is the display content of the display device 41 during which symbols are stopped in the variable display game. The display screen 1250 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 reserved number display 1253, a special figure 2 reserved number display 1254, a reserved display 1255, and a reserved use display 1256.

  The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 1251 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 1252 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 1251 is in charge of a game effect for the purpose of enhancing interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 1251 is largely displayed at a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 1251 includes a left symbol 1251L, a middle symbol 1251C, and a right symbol 1251R. The left symbol 1251L, the middle symbol 1251C, and the right symbol 1251R of the display screen 1250 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol stopped state.

  In general, the large symbol group 1251 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 1251L, the right symbol 1251R, and the middle symbol 1251C, and stops (including the temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 1251L, the right symbol 1251R, and the middle symbol 1251C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 1251 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 1251L and the right symbol 1251R, and can form a hit mode after the middle symbol 1251C is stopped.

  The symbols (the left symbol 1251L, the middle symbol 1251C, and the right symbol 1251R) constituting the large symbol group 1251 mainly use the decorative symbol A. For example, the left symbol 1251L displays the symbol 1201, the middle symbol 1251C displays the symbol 1203, and the right symbol 1251R displays the symbol 1205.

  The small symbol group 1252 is in charge of the notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 1252 is displayed small on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to secure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 1251. The small symbol group 1252 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 1252 on the display screen 1250 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the symbol stopped state.

  In general, the large symbol group 1251 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 1252, has a higher degree of freedom in the display position, and the display mode can be largely changed. Conversely, the small symbol group 1252 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 1251, and has a lower degree of freedom in display position (for example, fixed position).

  The special figure 1 reservation number display 1253 displays the storage number (starting storage number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 1254 displays the reserved number of special figure 2 games. The hold display 1255 allows the display mode to clearly indicate the number of storages of the special figure change display game and to notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each storage storage. The number of storages held by the hold display 1255 corresponds to the sum of the number of storages held by the special figure 1 hold number display 1253 and the number of storages held by the special figure 2 hold number display 1254. The reserved digest display 1256 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

  The display screen 1250 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1253 is “0” and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1254 is “0”. Therefore, the hold storage count indicated by the hold display 1255 is also “0”. In addition, the display screen 1250 indicates that the special figure change display game is in the symbol stop state by the reserved digest display 1256.

  In the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 are each configured by a three-digit symbol, but any number may be used as long as it includes one or more symbols. Also, in the gaming machine 10, the number of digits of the symbols is aligned in the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252, but the digit number of the symbol is different in the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252. Is also good.

  Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 1251 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change the transparency from 0% to 50%). Regarding the small symbol group 1252, the transparency of the symbol can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 1252 while securing the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 1251, and can easily grasp the gaming state of the player.

  Next, the change display process in the special figure change display game will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 167 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a display screen on the display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 168 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of a display screen on the display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 169 is a diagram (part 4) illustrating an example of a display screen on the display device of the fifth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols before starting the change in the change display game. The display screen 1261 shown in FIG. 167 (1) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252 are stopped and displayed. The large symbol group 1251 displays all graphic elements, numeric elements, and character elements in the decorative symbol A. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "1 (symbol 1201)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "2 (symbol 1202)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "2 (symbol 1202)". Displayed and stopped. The display screen 1261 displays the left symbol 1251L and the right symbol 1251R in a larger size than the middle symbol 1251C. The small symbol group 1252 displays a symbol corresponding to the large symbol group 1251 (for example, one-to-one correspondence) and is stopped. In the small symbol group 1252, the left symbol indicates "1", the middle symbol indicates "2", and the right symbol indicates "2". At this time, the storage number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reservation number display 1253 is “2”, and the storage number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reservation number display 1254 is “1”. Therefore, the number of pending storages indicated by the suspension display 1255 is “3”. In addition, the display screen 1261 indicates that the special figure change display game is being stopped by the reserved digest display 1256.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 starts symbol fluctuation. The display screen 1262 shown in FIG. 167 (2) shows a state where the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 using the decorative symbol A have started to be displayed in a variable manner. The large symbol group 1251 hides the graphic element and the character element in the decorative symbol A, and displays a numeric element. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L indicates "1 (symbol element 1202b)", the middle symbol 1251C indicates "2 (symbol element 1202b)", and the right symbol 1251R indicates "2 (symbol element 1202b). ) "Is displayed and the display is being changed. The display screen 1262 displays the left symbol 1251L and the right symbol 1251R in a larger size than the middle symbol 1251C. The small symbol group 1252 is displayed in a variable manner asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 by resolving the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251. At this time, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1253 is displayed by reducing the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game by one, and the reserved display 1255 is displayed by reducing the reserved memory number of the special figure variable display game by one. I do. The reserved digest display 1256 indicates that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 fluctuates by increasing the symbol fluctuation speed. The display screen 1264 shown in FIG. 167 (3) shows a state where the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 using the decorative symbol A are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The large symbol group 1251 hides the graphic element and the character element in the decorative symbol A, and displays the numeric element with a predetermined transmittance (for example, a transmittance of 70%).

  Next, the gaming machine 10 reduces the speed of the symbol change to be before the change stop (for example, the temporary stop first step). The display screen 1266 shown in FIG. 167 (4) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 using the decorative symbol A are before the fluctuation stop. The large symbol group 1251 hides the graphic element and the character element in the decorative symbol A, and displays a numeric element. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 facilitates the identification of the stop symbol. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "3 (symbol element 1203b)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "5 (symbol element 1205b)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "4 (symbol element 1204b). ) "Is displayed and the machine is temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is displayed in a variable manner asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is released.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 is before the fluctuation stop (for example, the temporary stop second step). The display screen 1268 shown in FIG. 168 (1) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 using the decorative symbol A have not been changed yet. The large symbol group 1251 hides graphic elements and numeric elements in the decorative symbol A, and displays character elements. That is, the gaming machine 10 switches the display target among the identification elements in the decorative pattern A from the numeric element to the character element. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clarify the correspondence between the number elements and the character elements. In addition, the gaming machine 10 facilitates the identification of the stop symbol from various viewpoints. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "3 (symbol element 1203c)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "5 (symbol element 1205c)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "4 (symbol element 1204c). ) "Is displayed and the machine is temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is displayed in a variable manner asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is released.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 is in a state before the fluctuation stop (for example, a temporary stop third step). The display screen 1270 shown in FIG. 168 (2) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1251 and the small symbol group 1252 using the decorative symbol A have not been changed yet. The large symbol group 1251 displays a graphic element, a numeral element, and a character element in the decorative symbol A. That is, the gaming machine 10 switches the display target among the identification elements in the decorative pattern A from the character elements to all the identification elements. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can clarify the correspondence between the character element and the graphic element. In addition, the gaming machine 10 facilitates the identification of the stop symbol from various viewpoints. In the large symbol group 1251, the left symbol 1251L displays "3 (symbol 1203)", the middle symbol 1251C displays "5 (symbol 1205)", and the right symbol 1251R displays "4 (symbol 1204)". Displayed and temporarily stopped. The small symbol group 1252 is displayed in a variable manner asynchronously with the large symbol group 1251 while the correspondence with the large symbol group 1251 is released.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 stops changing. The display screen 1272 shown in FIG. 168 (3) shows that the large symbol group 1251 using the decorative symbol A and the small symbol group 1252 are in the fluctuation stop state. The small symbol group 1252 is stopped and displayed in correspondence with the large symbol group 1251. Also, the display screen 1272 indicates that the special figure change display game has been stopped by the hold digest display 1256.

In this manner, the gaming machine 10 can satisfactorily visually recognize the symbols according to the variable display process, and can satisfactorily identify the symbols according to the variable display process.
Next, FIG. 169 (1) shows another example of the display mode of the decorative symbol during the symbol variation (for example, the reach variation). The display screen 1274 shows a state where the large symbol group 1277 and the small symbol group 1252 are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The display screen 1274 includes an effect display area 1275. The display area of the large symbol group 1277 is smaller than the display area of the large symbol group 1251, and is not enough to display the decorative symbol A. Therefore, the decoration similar to a part of the identification elements of the decorative symbol A The symbol B is displayed. The effect display area 1275 is playing the movie A, and the movie A displays an effect element 1276. The large symbol group 1277 displays a decorative symbol B corresponding to the effect element 1276.

  FIG. 169 (2) shows another example of the display mode of the decorative symbol during the symbol variation (for example, the reach variation). The display screen 1278 shows a state where the large symbol group 1277 and the small symbol group 1252 are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The display screen 1278 includes an effect display area 1275. The display area of the large symbol group 1277 is smaller than the display area of the large symbol group 1251, and is not enough to display the decorative symbol A. Therefore, the decoration similar to a part of the identification elements of the decorative symbol A The symbol C is displayed. The effect display area 1275 is playing movie B, and the movie B displays an effect element 1279. The large symbol group 1277 displays a decorative symbol C corresponding to the effect element 1276.

  In this way, when the size of the display area of the large symbol group 1277 is not sufficient, the gaming machine 10 can display the decorative symbol B or the decorative symbol C instead of the decorative symbol A. Further, the gaming machine 10 can selectively display the decorative symbol B or the decorative symbol C in accordance with the display content of the effect display area 1275.

  Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the discrimination of the symbols in the large symbol group 1277 while improving the effect of the effect by the effect display area 1275. Further, the gaming machine 10 can further enhance the effect by performing a cooperative effect with the effect display area 1275 and the large symbol group 1277.

  Next, the switching timing of the display mode of the decorative symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart illustrating switching timing of the decorative symbol display mode in the special figure game variation of the fifth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 performs a special figure game change in which a period Ta from the timing t11 to the timing t17 is a symbol variation time, and a period Tb from the timing t17 to the timing t18 is a symbol stop time.

  The decorative symbol A is a display mode (A1) in which all the identification elements are displayed from before the symbol change starts until timing t12 (including at least the period Ta1 from timing t11 to timing t12). Further, the decorative pattern A is a display mode (A2) in which a graphic element and a character element are not displayed and a numeric element is displayed in a period Ta2 from timing t12 to timing t13.

  The period Ta3 from the timing t13 to the timing t14 is a movie effect period. When the movie A is displayed, the decorative symbol A is switched to the decorative symbol B, and when the movie B is displayed, the decorative symbol A becomes the decorative symbol C. Can be switched. In addition, when the period Ta3 from the timing t13 to the timing t14 is not set as the movie effect period, the decorative symbol A may be continuously displayed in the period.

  When the movie effect period ends at timing t14, the decorative symbol B or the decorative symbol C is switched to the decorative symbol A. The decorative pattern A is a display mode (A2) in which a figure element and a character element are not displayed and a number element is displayed in a period Ta4 from timing t14 to timing t15. The decorative pattern A is a display mode (A3) in which graphic elements and numeric elements are not displayed and character elements are displayed in a period Ta5 from timing t15 to timing t16. The decorative pattern A is a display mode (A1) in which all the identification elements are displayed in a period Ta6 from timing t16 to timing t17, and continues the display mode (A1) including a period Tb from timing t17 to timing t18. I do.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can selectively display two or more identification elements included in the decorative symbol according to the variable display state. Note that the selective display mode and the switching order of the two or more identification elements included in the decorative pattern are not limited to those illustrated, but may be another combination or another switching order.

  Next, a first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the gaming machine 10 according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern includes two or more identification elements and accessory elements. The decorative pattern of Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a diagram illustrating an example of a decorative pattern according to Modification Example 1 of the fifth embodiment.

  Description will be given using a symbol 1291 which is a symbol displaying the numeral “1” on behalf of the decorative symbol A. Note that other symbols (for example, symbols displaying the numbers “2” and “3”) are the same as the symbols 1291, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  The symbol 1291 is a symbol that displays the number “1”. The pattern 1291 is composed of a graphic element 1291a having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a figure (for example, a character such as a boy), a numerical element 1291b having a distinctiveness as a pattern by a numeral "1", and an attachment that does not always have a distinctive power. Element 1291c. That is, the graphic element 1291a and the numerical element 1291b are the identification elements of the design 1291, respectively. Further, the graphic element 1291a, the numeral element 1291b, and the accessory element 1291c are constituent elements of the design 1291, respectively.

  The attached element 1291c may have a display mode different from that of the attached element in another symbol, or may have an overlapping display mode. The attached element 1291c has a predetermined display mode (for example, a star mark) by default, and changes the display mode to one of special symbols at a predetermined time.

  The special symbol includes, for example, “tiger”, “pig”, and “lion” as characters for notifying transition to a predetermined game state in the variable display game. At this time, “tiger” reports the transition to the tiger (tiger) mode (for example, latent probability change), “pig” reports the transition to the pig (pig) mode (for example, gendai support), and “lion” represents the lion. Notify the transition to the (lion) mode (for example, probability fluctuation). Note that the special symbol may include, for example, "tiger", "pig", and "lion" as characters for notifying a predetermined effect in the variable display game. At this time, "tiger" foretells the production with a character like a tiger (tiger), "pig" foretells the production with a character like a pig (pig), and "lion" gives a lion (lion) A performance in which a character like appears.

  The special symbol is a character that reports the reliability of a result (for example, a big hit) derived by the variable display game, for example, “?”, “!”, “!!!”, “chance”, “hot”, “ Sure. " At this time, "?" Reports the jackpot reliability "1%", "!" Reports the jackpot reliability "10%", and "!!" reports the jackpot reliability "20%". , “Chance” reports the reliability of the jackpot “30%”, “Heat Heat” reports the reliability of the jackpot “90%”, and “Probable” reports the reliability of the jackpot “100%”. Further, the special symbol includes, for example, "development" and "continuation" as characters for notifying the progress in the variable display game. At this time, "development" reports the development to super reach, and "continuation" reports the continuation of the pseudo-ream. Further, the special symbol includes, for example, “hit”, “this 5R”, “this 16R”, “time saving”, and “probable change” as characters that notify the value of the result (hit) derived by the variable display game. At this time, the “hit” reports the hit itself without specifying the magnitude of the value, “5R” reports that it is a 5R round, and “this 16R” indicates that it is a 16R round. Informing, "time saving" informs that the hit is accompanied by a time saving (generic power support), and "probable change" informs that the hit is accompanied by a probability change.

  The special symbols include, for example, "modeA", "modeB", and "modeC" as characters for notifying a mode change in the display effect. At this time, “mode A” reports the transition to mode A, “mode B” reports the transition to mode B, and “mode C” reports the transition to mode C. In addition, the special symbol includes, for example, “last 10 times” as a character that informs the number of continuations of a predetermined game state, such as general-purpose support and probability fluctuation. At this time, “last 10 times” indicates that the number of times the probability fluctuation is continued is remaining 10 times. Further, the special symbol includes, for example, "press!" As a character for notifying the game guidance. At this time, “press!” Notifies the reception timing of the pressing operation of the push button 25.

  The pattern 1291 can also selectively display the identification element and the accessory element, similarly to the decorative pattern A described in the fifth embodiment. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can achieve both an improvement in the pattern identification and an improvement in the effect of the design.

  Next, a description will be given of a gaming machine 10 according to a second modification of the fifth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment makes it possible to easily recognize the fluctuation state of the symbol by the temporary stop display mode according to the fluctuation display process.

First, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen on a display device of Modification Example 2 of the fifth embodiment.
The display screen 1330 shown in FIG. 172 (1) is the display content of the display device 41 during the symbol stop in the variable display game. The display screen 1330 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 reservation number display 1303, a special figure 2 reservation number display 1304, a reservation display 1305, and a reservation digest display 1306 in the display contents.

  The two sets of decorative symbols include a large symbol group 1331 as a first decorative symbol and a small symbol group 1302 as a second decorative symbol. The large symbol group 1331 is in charge of a game effect for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 1331 is displayed large in a substantially central portion of the display device 41. The large symbol group 1331 includes an upper left symbol 1331A, a lower left symbol 1331B, a middle upper symbol 1331C, a middle and lower symbol 1331D, an upper right symbol 1331E, and a lower right symbol 1331F. The upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper middle symbol 1331C, the lower middle symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the display screen 1330 all have the corresponding special figure change display game in the symbol stopped state. It is shown that. The large symbol group 1331 includes a first effective line including an upper left symbol 1331A, a middle upper symbol 1331C, and an upper right symbol 1331E, and a second effective line including a lower left symbol 1331B, a lower middle symbol 1331D, and a lower right symbol 1331F. , The winning effective line.

  The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper middle symbol 1331C and the lower middle symbol 1331D, and the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F are on the same symbol array and scroll vertically in conjunction with each other.

  The upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper middle symbol 1331C, the lower middle symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F are each configured to include an identification element 1332 and an auxiliary element 1333. You. The identification element 1332 includes information that can uniquely specify a symbol, and includes, for example, a number. The auxiliary element 1333 is an auxiliary element that guides a change state of the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper middle symbol 1331C, the lower middle symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F. For example, the upper left symbol 1331A includes the number “1” as the identification element 1332, and is identified as a symbol corresponding to the number “1”. In the upper left symbol 1331A, the symbol stopped state is guided by the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333.

  Note that the auxiliary element 1333 is a display element that assists in guiding the state of the fluctuation table, and is a decorative element that decorates a symbol in one viewpoint. The auxiliary element 1333 can be composed of, for example, a character or a figure.

  The small symbol group 1302 is in charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the gaming state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 1302 is displayed small on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 1331. The small symbol group 1302 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 1302 on the display screen 1330 indicate that the corresponding special figure variable display game is in the symbol stopped state.

  In general, the large symbol group 1331 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 1302, has a higher degree of freedom in the display position, and its display mode can be largely changed. Conversely, the small symbol group 1302 is displayed smaller than the large symbol group 1331 and has a lower degree of freedom in the display position (for example, fixed position).

  The special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 displays the reserved memory number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 displays the reserved number of special figure 2 games. The hold display 1305 can clearly indicate the number of storages of the special figure change display game and indicate the degree of expectation for the game result for each storage by the display mode. The number of held storages displayed by the hold display 1305 corresponds to the sum of the number of held storages displayed by the special figure 1 held number display 1303 and the number of held storages displayed by the special figure 2 held number display 1304. The reserved digest display 1306 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in the variable display state and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result by the display mode.

  The display screen 1330 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 is “0” and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 is “0”. Therefore, the hold storage count indicated by the hold display 1305 is also “0”. In addition, the display screen 1330 indicates that the special figure change display game is in the symbol stop state by the reserved digest display 1306.

  In the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 1331 is composed of six symbols, and the small symbol group 1302 is composed of three digits. However, any number may be used as long as it includes one or more symbols. In the gaming machine 10, the number of digits of the symbols is aligned in the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302, but the number of symbols in the symbol is different between the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302. Is also good. For example, the small symbol group 1302 displays symbols “1, 2, 2” corresponding to the first activated line of the large symbol group 1331. However, the small symbol group 1302 corresponds to the first activated line and the second activated line of the large symbol group 1331. To display the symbol "1, 2, 2, 2, 1, 1".

  Further, even if the gaming machine 10 changes the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 during the variable display and during the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, changes the transparency from 0% to 50%), With respect to the small symbol group 1302, the transparency of the symbol can be fixed (for example, the transparency is fixed to 0%). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 1302 while securing the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 1331 and can easily grasp the gaming state of the player.

  The gaming machine 10 may change the hue of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 (for example, change from red to blue) during the variable display and during the stop display, or during the variable display, and For 1302, the hue of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to red). Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the saturation of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 during the variable display and during the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change the saturation from 100% to 0%). Also, it is possible to fix the saturation of the symbol for the small symbol group 1302 (for example, to fix the saturation to 100%). Also, the gaming machine 10 may change the lightness of the symbol for the large symbol group 1331 during the variable display and during the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change the lightness from 100% to 10%). For the small symbol group 1302, the brightness of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%). Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the size of the symbol of the large symbol group 1331 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change the size from the standard size to the enlarged (reduced) size). Even if there is, the size of the symbol can be fixed for the small symbol group 1302. The gaming machine 10 may change the display position of the symbol in the large symbol group 1331 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, from the center of the screen to the upper left of the screen). The display position of the symbols in the small symbol group 1302 can be fixed (for example, fixed to the lower right of the screen). Also, the gaming machine 10 can change the design of the large symbol group 1331 (for example, from a rectangle to a circle, or from a numeral to a character) during the variable display, during the stop display, or during the variable display. Even so, the design of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number) for the small symbol group 1302. Further, even when the gaming machine 10 may change the symbol variable display mode for the large symbol group 1331 during the variable display (for example, change from vertical scroll to horizontal scroll), the symbol variable display mode for the small symbol group 1302 may be changed. Can be fixed (for example, fixed to shaft rotation fluctuation).

  These also allow the gaming machine 10 to secure the visibility of the small symbol group 1302 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 1331, and facilitate the grasp of the gaming state of the player.

  Also, the gaming machine 10 can change the variation mode during the variable display for the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302. For example, when the vertical scroll is performed on the large symbol group 1331, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish the large symbol group 1331 from the small symbol group 1302. Further, even when the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 update symbols asynchronously, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player.

  The display screen 1334 shown in FIG. 172 (2) is the display content of the display device 41 during the symbol change in the change display game. The display screen 1334 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 is “1”, and the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 1304 is “0”. Therefore, the hold storage count indicated by the hold display 1305 is also “1”. In addition, the display screen 1334 indicates that the special figure change display game is changing the symbol by the reserved digest display 1306. The upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper middle symbol 1331C, the lower middle symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the display screen 1334 are all in the corresponding symbol variation display game. It is shown that. In addition, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 1302 on the display screen 1334 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

  At this time, the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper middle symbol 1331C, the lower middle symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F are all displayed with the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 being unspecified. Indicates that the display is being changed.

  Here, a display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example of a large symbol display mode on a display device according to Modification Example 2 of the fifth embodiment.

  A symbol 1335 shown in FIG. 173 (1) is a display mode of one of the symbols (large symbols) included in the large symbol group 1331 and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is not specified. The display mode (not explicitly shown) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific change display state. For example, the symbol 1335 is a display mode from the start of the change to the symbol stop (temporary stop).

  A symbol 1336 shown in FIG. 173 (2) is a display mode of one of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331 and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is specified in a first color (for example, silver). The display mode (clear) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific variable display state, for example, a state during symbol stop (temporary stop).

  A symbol 1336 shown in FIG. 173 (3) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331 and shows a state in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is clearly indicated in the second color (for example, gold). The display mode (clear) of the auxiliary element 1333 indicates a specific variable display state, for example, a state during symbol stop (temporary stop).

  In addition, the color in the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 may be selected according to the current game state, such as establishment of the reach in the big hit effective line and establishment of the big hit in the big hit effective line. In addition, the color in the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 may be selected according to the progress of the game, such as the magnitude of the expectation, the reach announcement, the big hit announcement, and the like.

  Next, the temporary stop display mode of the symbols (large symbols) included in the large symbol group 1331 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop display mode list for each large symbol state in the display device according to Modification Example 2 of the fifth embodiment.

  A symbol 1338 shown in FIG. 174 (1) is a display mode of one of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331 and shows a temporary stop display mode in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is hidden. The symbol 1338 swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) with the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 hidden.

  The symbol 1339 shown in FIG. 174 (2) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a temporary stop display mode in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is clearly shown. The symbol 1339 dynamically changes the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 (for example, alternately displays the symbol 1339a and the symbol 1339b) (non-fixed display). Such a temporary stop display mode is excellent in the visibility of the identification element 1332 because the identification element 1332 is statically displayed. On the other hand, in the temporary stop display mode, since the auxiliary element 1333 is dynamically displayed, the symbol 1339 can reduce the guidance effect and the effect of the temporary stop display state while securing the visibility of the identification element 1332. Can be compatible.

  A symbol 1340 shown in FIG. 174 (3) is one display mode of the symbols included in the large symbol group 1331, and shows a temporary stop display mode in which the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is clearly shown. The symbol 1340 oscillates (eg, the symbol 1340a) by rotating the symbol 1340 at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis while statically displaying (fixingly displaying) the auxiliary element 1333 with respect to the identification element 1332. And the symbol 1340b are alternately displayed). In such a temporary stop display mode, guidance and effect of the temporary stop display state can be performed in a form different from the temporary stop display mode by the symbol 1339.

  Next, the change display process in the special figure change display game will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 1) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example (Part 2) of a screen displayed by the display device in Modification Example 2 of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example (part 3) of a screen displayed by the display device of the second modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 178 is a diagram illustrating an example (No. 4) of a screen displayed by the display device of Modification Example 2 of the fifth embodiment.

  The gaming machine 10 stops and displays the symbols before starting the change in the change display game. The display screen 1341 shown in FIG. 175 (1) shows a state where the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A indicates "1", the middle upper symbol 1331C indicates "2", the upper right symbol 1331E indicates "2", and the lower left symbol 1331B indicates "2". Is displayed, and the lower middle symbol 1331D displays "1", and the lower right symbol 1331F displays "1", and is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 displays a symbol corresponding to the large symbol group 1331 and is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 displays “1” for the left symbol, “2” for the middle symbol, and “2” for the right symbol. At this time, the storage number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reservation number display 1303 is “2”, and the storage number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reservation number display 1304 is “1”. Therefore, the number of storages on hold indicated by the hold display 1305 is “3”. Further, the display screen 1341 indicates that the special figure change display game is in the symbol stop state by the reserved digest display 1306.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 starts symbol fluctuation. The display screen 1342 shown in FIG. 175 (2) shows a state in which the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 have started the variable display. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper middle symbol 1331C, the lower middle symbol 1331D, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F are being displayed in a variable manner. The small symbol group 1302 is changing display asynchronously with the large symbol group 1331 by resolving the correspondence with the large symbol group 1331. At this time, the special figure 1 reserved number display 1303 reduces and displays the reserved figure number of the special figure 1 game by one, and the reserved display 1305 reduces and displays the reserved figure number of the special figure variable display game by one. I do. The reserved digest display 1306 indicates that the special figure change display game is in the change display state.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B in a temporary manner. On the display screen 1344 shown in FIG. 175 (3), the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a temporary manner, the upper middle symbol 1331C, the lower middle symbol 1331D, and the upper right The symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and temporarily stop while swinging up and down. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without temporarily stopping. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B is a temporary temporary stop display mode, and is smoothly connected to the temporary stop display mode performed by the display screen 1346 shown in FIG. 175 (4). It is a connection display. The temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B swings vertically in synchronization with the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B (see the symbol 1338 in FIG. 174). In addition, since the gaming machine 10 is in the temporary temporary stop display mode, the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B swing vertically in synchronization with each other for a short period (for example, one cycle).

  Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B in a non-temporary manner. The display screen 1346 shown in FIG. 175 (4) shows that the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped in a non-temporary manner, and the upper middle symbol 1331C and the lower middle symbol 1331D are displayed. The upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F are being changed and displayed. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B temporarily stop while displaying "1" and "2", respectively, and dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without temporarily stopping. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode. The temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B dynamically changes the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 between the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B in synchronization (see the symbol 1339 in FIG. 174). Since the gaming machine 10 is in the non-temporary temporary stop display mode, the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 is repeatedly changed dynamically with the upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops and displays the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F in a non-temporary manner. The display screen 1348 shown in FIG. 176 (1) displays the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 in a non-temporary manner, and temporarily stops the display. The upper middle symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D are being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F display "1" and "9" respectively to change the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. Stop temporarily while changing dynamically. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without temporarily stopping. At this time, the display screen 1348 forms the reach mode of the symbol “1” with the first payline.

  Next, the gaming machine 10 notifies the reach mode formed by the first activated line. The display screen 1350 shown in FIG. 176 (2) notifies the reach mode formed by the first effective line by the notification display 1351. The notification display 1351 guides the formation of the reach mode by the text message “reach!”, And guides the formation of the reach mode in the first effective line by the outer shape along the first effective line. In this way, the gaming machine 10 temporarily stops while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 as one of the variable display states (reach mode forming process) until the notification of the reach mode is performed. . That is, the temporary stop display mode while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 guides the reach mode forming process.

  The upper left symbol 1331A and the upper right symbol 1331E that form the reach mode with the first activated line have the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 as the second color (for example, gold), and clearly indicate the formation of the reach mode to the player (reach notification). ). In addition, the upper left symbol 1331A and the upper right symbol 1331E clearly indicate the formation notice of the reach mode to the player by setting the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 to the second color before the reach mode is formed by the first activated line. (Notice). In addition, the design which is not a notice object shows the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333 in a state clearly indicated by a first color (for example, silver).

  Next, the gaming machine 10 displays a reach mode (a process of forming a hit mode). In the display screen 1352 shown in FIG. 176 (3), the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a non-temporary manner. The upper middle symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D are being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B display "1" and "2", respectively, and the upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F display "1" and "9", respectively.

  The upper left symbol 1331A and the upper right symbol 1331E forming the reach mode in the first effective line temporarily stop while swinging at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis. On the other hand, the lower left symbol 1331B and the lower right symbol 1331F that do not form the reach mode in the second effective line are displayed translucent after the symbols are stopped. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without temporarily stopping.

  In this way, after the notification of the reach mode, the gaming machine 10 swings by turning the symbol at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis as one of the variable display states (hit mode forming process). While temporarily stopping. That is, the temporary stop display mode in which the symbol is swung at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis guides the hitting mode forming process.

  The display screen 1354 shown in FIG. 176 (4) displays the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 in a non-temporary manner, and temporarily stops the display. The middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D are being displayed while being changed while being enlarged. The display screen 1354 is one of the display states in which the player's attention is expected to be paid to the upper middle symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D. The display screen 1354 is one of display modes for guiding the hit mode forming process, like the display screen 1352.

  The display screen 1356 shown in FIG. 177 (1) displays the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 in a temporary manner in a non-temporary manner, The middle upper symbol 1331C is being displayed while being changed while being enlarged. The display screen 1356 is one of display states in which it is expected that the player's attention is paid to the upper middle symbol 1331C. The display screen 1356 is one of display modes for guiding the hit mode forming process, like the display screen 1352.

  The display screen 1358 shown in FIG. 177 (2) displays the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 in a temporary manner in a non-temporary manner, The middle upper symbol 1331C is temporarily stopped. The display screen 1358 is one of display states in which the player's attention is expected to be paid to the upper middle symbol 1331C. The display screen 1358 is one of the display modes for guiding the hit mode forming process, like the display screen 1352. In addition, the middle upper symbol 1331C displays “1” and temporarily stops while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333.

  The display screen 1360 shown in FIG. 177 (3) and the display screen 1362 shown in FIG. 177 (4) temporarily display the hit mode (process of forming the hit mode). The display screens 1360 and 1362 temporarily display the symbols on the first effective line in the large symbol group 1331 while swinging at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical axis, and display the symbols on the second effective line. Stop and display the symbol.

  The display screen 1364 shown in FIG. 178 (1) stops the symbols in a winning manner and derives a variable display result in the variable display game. The display screen 1364 shows a state where the large symbol group 1331 and the small symbol group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A displays “1”, the middle upper symbol 1331C displays “1”, the upper right symbol 1331E displays “1”, and the lower left symbol 1331B displays “2”. Is displayed, the lower middle symbol 1331D displays “9”, and the lower right symbol 1331F displays “9”, and is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 displays a symbol corresponding to the large symbol group 1331 and is stopped. In the small symbol group 1302, the left symbol indicates "1", the middle symbol indicates "1", and the right symbol indicates "1". The display screen 1364 indicates that the special figure change display game has been stopped by the hold digest display 1306.

  Up to this point, the variable display process of reaching the hit mode through the reach mode forming process and the hit mode forming process has been described. Next, the variable display process of reaching the disconnect mode without going through the reach mode forming process will be described.

  The display screen 1366 shown in FIG. 178 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 1364. On the display screen 1366, the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F of the large symbol group 1331 are temporarily stopped in a non-temporary manner, and the middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol are displayed. The symbol 1331D is being displayed in a variable manner. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B temporarily stop while displaying “1” and “2”, respectively, and dynamically change the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. The upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F respectively display “1” and “2”. "7" and "6" are displayed, and the temporary stop is performed while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. That is, the display screen 1366 does not form the reach mode in any of the first activated line and the second activated line.

  In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without temporarily stopping. At this time, the temporary stop display performed by the upper left symbol 1331A, the lower left symbol 1331B, the upper right symbol 1331E, and the lower right symbol 1331F is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode.

  The display screen 1368 shown in FIG. 178 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 1366. The display screen 1368 is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode in which all symbols in the symbol group 1331 are displayed. The upper left symbol 1331A and the lower left symbol 1331B temporarily stop while displaying "1" and "2", respectively, and dynamically change the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. The middle upper symbol 1331C and the middle lower symbol 1331D respectively "6" and "5" are displayed to temporarily stop while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. The upper right symbol 1331E and the lower right symbol 1331F display "7" and "6", respectively. The temporary stop is performed while dynamically changing the display mode of the auxiliary element 1333. That is, the display screen 1368 is in the out-of-way mode in which the reach mode is not formed in any of the first active line and the second active line. In the small symbol group 1302, some symbols are displayed in a variable manner without temporarily stopping. At this time, the temporary stop display performed on all the symbols of the symbol group 1331 is a non-temporary temporary stop display mode. That is, the display screen 1368 does not have a chance to perform a temporary stop display for guiding the hit state forming process by reaching the disengaged state without going through the reach mode forming process.

  The display screen 1370 shown in FIG. 178 (4) stops and displays the symbols in an off mode, and derives a variable display result in the variable display game. Display screen 1370 shows a state where large symbol group 1331 and small symbol group 1302 are stopped and displayed. In the large symbol group 1331, the upper left symbol 1331A displays “1”, the middle upper symbol 1331C displays “6”, the upper right symbol 1331E displays “7”, and the lower left symbol 1331B displays “2”. Is displayed, the lower middle symbol 1331D displays “5”, and the lower right symbol 1331F displays “6”, and the display is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 displays a symbol corresponding to the large symbol group 1331 and is stopped. The small symbol group 1302 displays “1” for the left symbol, “6” for the middle symbol, and “7” for the right symbol. The display screen 1370 indicates that the special figure change display game has been stopped by the hold digest display 1306.

  In the gaming machine 10, the temporary stop display mode is changed according to the reach mode forming process or the hit mode forming process, but the temporary stop display mode is changed according to another variable display state (game state). You may.

  In the gaming machine 10, the temporary stop display mode is changed according to the reach mode forming process or the hit mode forming process. However, the temporary stop display mode may be changed according to the number of symbols to be temporarily stopped. .

  In the gaming machine 10, the temporary stop display mode is changed according to the reach mode forming process or the hit mode forming process. However, the temporary stop display mode may be changed according to the position or the number of active lines. .

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 changes the temporary stop display mode according to the variable display state (game state), thereby guiding the player from the temporary stop display mode displayed on the display device 41 to the variable display state. be able to.

  Next, a gaming machine 10 according to a third modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming machine 10 of Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment changes the temporary stop display mode by changing the symbol display mode.

  A temporary stop display mode of the gaming machine 10 according to the third modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of a temporary stop display mode of a large symbol on the display device according to Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

  A symbol 1380 shown in FIG. 179 (1) is a symbol constituting the large symbol group 1331. The symbol 1380 includes a background element 1381, a sub-identification element 1382, and a main identification element 1383. The pattern 1380 overlaps the sub-identification element 1382 and the main identification element 1383 with the background element 1381 as a background, and makes the main identification element 1383 the foreground. The main identification element 1383 is an identification display capable of specifying a design, and is, for example, a character or a figure. The sub-identification element 1382 is an identification display that assists the main identification element 1383 to specify the design, and is, for example, a character. The pattern 1380 includes a background element 1381, a sub-identification element 1382, and a main identification element 1383, and swings in the scroll direction (up-down direction) to realize one of temporary stop display modes.

  A symbol 1384 shown in FIG. 179 (2) is a symbol constituting the large symbol group 1331. The symbol 1384 includes a sub-identification element 1382 and a main identification element 1383. The pattern 1384 overlaps the sub-identification element 1382 and the main identification element 1383, and makes the main identification element 1383 the foreground. The pattern 1384 realizes one of the temporary stop display modes by swinging in the scroll direction (vertical direction) including the sub-identification element 1382 and the main identification element 1383.

  A symbol 1385 shown in FIG. 179 (3) is a symbol constituting the large symbol group 1331. The pattern 1385 includes a background element 1381 and a main identification element 1383. The pattern 1385 overlaps the main identification element 1383 with the background element 1381 as a background, and makes the main identification element 1383 the foreground. The pattern 1385 includes a background element 1381 and a main identification element 1383 and swings in the scroll direction (vertical direction) to realize one of the temporary stop display modes.

  A symbol 1386 shown in FIG. 179 (4) is a symbol constituting the large symbol group 1331. The symbol 1386 includes a main identification element 1383. The symbol 1386 makes the main identification element 1383 the foreground. The symbol 1386 realizes one of the temporary stop display modes by swinging in the scroll direction (vertical direction) including the main identification element 1383.

  In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the temporary stop display mode by changing the symbol display mode. With the temporary stop display mode changed in this way, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to the variable display state.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment (including the modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (a special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including a symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Further, the control means displays a predetermined number of symbols in the first temporary stop display mode when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) of the symbol group form a reach mode and perform a temporary stop display ( Display screens 1352, 1354), and when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) perform temporary stop display without forming a reach mode, the predetermined number of symbols is different from the first temporary stop display mode. The second temporary stop display mode (display screens 1366, 1368) is displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment (including the modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The control means includes a first component (for example, a graphic element 1201a) having a first discriminating power and a second component (for example, a numeral element 1201b or a character element 1201c) having a second discriminating power. And selectively display the first component and the second component on the display means in accordance with the variable display process.

  (2) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (a special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including a symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Further, the control means displays a predetermined number of symbols in the first temporary stop display mode when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) of the symbol group form a reach mode and perform a temporary stop display ( Display screens 1352, 1354), and when a predetermined number of symbols (upper left symbol 1331A, upper right symbol 1331E) perform temporary stop display without forming a reach mode, the predetermined number of symbols is different from the first temporary stop display mode. The second temporary stop display mode (display screens 1366, 1368) is displayed on the display means.

  (3) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game (a special figure 1 variable display game, a special figure 2 variable display game). The control means causes the display means to display the variable display game including a symbol group (large symbol group 1331) composed of a plurality of symbols. Further, when performing the temporary stop display of the symbol, the control means adds a decorative element (auxiliary element 1333) for decorating the symbol to the symbol, stops the symbol, and sets the decorative element to the non-stop state (symbol 1339). And display it on the display means (display screens 1348, 1350).

  Note that the above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In this case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the processing functions are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded on a computer-readable recording medium. Examples of the computer-readable recording medium include a magnetic storage device, an optical disk, a magneto-optical recording medium, and a semiconductor memory. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. The optical disk includes a DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), a DVD-RAM, a CD (Compact Disk) -ROM / RW (ReWritable), and the like. The magneto-optical recording medium includes an MO (Magneto-Optical disk) and the like.

  When distributing the program, for example, portable recording media such as DVDs and CD-ROMs on which the program is recorded are sold. Alternatively, the program may be stored in a storage device of a server computer, and the program may be transferred from the server computer to another computer via a network.

  The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded on the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. Note that the computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Further, the computer can also execute processing according to the received program each time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

  Further, at least a part of the above processing functions can be realized by an electronic circuit such as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, but may include, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use a game ball, and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

  The disclosed embodiments are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and a modification. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Amusement machine 41 Display device 100 Game control device 300 Production control device

Claims (1)

Display means capable of displaying a variable display game for variable display of symbols,
Control means for displaying the variable display game on the display means,
The control means includes:
A first temporary stop display mode and a second temporary stop display mode different from the first temporary stop display mode can be displayed on the display unit as the temporary stop display of the symbol,
The display mode of the symbol during the variable display is different from the display mode of the symbol during the temporary stop display in the second temporary stop display mode.
Gaming machine.

Images